Quarterlytics / Specialty Retail / SCS Group Plc

SCS Group Plc

scs. · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker scs.
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry Specialty Retail
Employees 1001-5000
← All annual reports
FY2020 Annual Report · SCS Group Plc
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
S

c

S

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

2

0

Delivering  
our values

Annual Report 2020

 
 
 
 
 
 
Financial Statements

78-112

78 

85 

Independent Auditors’ Report  
to the Members of ScS Group plc

 Consolidated Statement  
of Comprehensive Income

86  Consolidated Statement  
of Financial Position

87 

88 

89 

 Consolidated Statement  
of Changes in Equity 

 Consolidated Statement  
of Cash Flows

 Notes to the Consolidated  
Financial Statements

106  Company Statement of Financial Position

107  Company Statement of Changes in Equity

108  Company Statement of Cash Flows

109  Notes to the Company  

Financial Statements

112  Company Information

Strategic Report

2-49

2 

At a Glance

4  Delivering our Values

14  Our Business Model

16  Our markets

18  Chairman’s Letter

20  CEO’s Review

24  Our Strategy

26  Key Performance Indicators

28 

 Financial Review

32  Stakeholder Engagement

34  Risk and Risk Management

36  Principal Risks and Uncertainties

49  Viability Statement

Corporate Governance

50-77

50  Board of Directors

52  Corporate Governance Statement

57  Audit Committee Report

62  Directors’ Remuneration Report

69  Remuneration Policy Report

74  Directors’ Report

77  Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities

 
ScS is one of the UK’s leading 
furniture and flooring retailers, 
operating from 100 stores.

After more than 100 years 
of offering customers 
the best combination of 
value, quality and choice, 
this year has been like 
no other we have faced. 
Despite the challenges, 
our dedicated colleagues 
have lived our values and 
continue to deliver for all 
of our stakeholders.

Read more on pages 4 to 13

1

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTS2

At a Glance

Providing excellent customer 
experience with outstanding 
value, quality and choice

About us
At ScS, we pride ourselves on being the UK’s ‘Sofa Carpet 
Specialist’. We have a clear purpose and strategy which drives 
us day-to-day and ensures we offer our customers the best 
combination of customer service, value-for-money, quality 
and product choice. Our dedicated team of specialists are 
highly-trained in their fields. We are one of the UK’s leading 
furniture and flooring retailers and have over 100 years of 
furniture and retailing experience.

Our purpose
Our customers homes are special places – 
they are where they relax and enjoy quality 
time with their families. We want to make sure 
they have the best available choice of quality 
furniture and flooring, and all at the right 
price. Founded in the 1890s as a family-owned 
business in Sunderland, we understand our 
customers and how important customer 
experience and value are to them. Our 
business and reputation is built on offering 
outstanding value-for-money along with an 
excellent experience. We combine this with a 
relentless focus on great quality and choice, 
throughout our bespoke and extensive sofa 
ranges and our specialist flooring offering. Our 
customers are paramount to us and we place 
them at the heart of what we do, through our 
purpose, culture and values. At ScS, we focus 
on providing an excellent customer experience 
with outstanding value, quality and choice.

Read more on Our Business 
Model on pages 14-15

it encourages our people to give their  
very best and enjoy what they do. We are 
committed to creating a great place to 
work and our culture is underpinned by  
our RIGHT values:

Responsive: To our customers, colleagues, 
markets and new ways of working; 

Inclusive: Working and communicating 
with each other to achieve common goals;

Get it right: Doing things right first time;
Hard working: Passionate, committed  
and driven with a winning attitude; and

Trusted: Operating with fairness, respect, 
honesty and integrity.

We encourage an open and honest culture 
when engaging with our stakeholders.  
We inspire success in our teams, ensuring 
that all our colleagues feel supported. 
Every staff member is treated as an equal 
and we recognise and reward people for 
doing the right thing.

Our values
Our people make us who we are, and building 
and inspiring an outstanding team is at  
the forefront of our business strategy;  

Delivering our values will continue to  
help our business grow, evolve and build  
a community that our people are proud  
to be a part of.

Our responsibility 

At ScS, we have a clear vision to be  
Britain’s best value sofa and carpet retailer. 
At the same time, we recognise that as a 
responsible business we have an obligation 
to operate in a manner that is both ethical 
and sustainable. 

Our focus is on three key areas: 
 – People, to continue to make ScS a great 
place to work, with a focus on building 
and inspiring an outstanding team; 

 – Community, where we put emphasis 
on local charitable fundraising; and
 – Sustainability, where our emphasis 

is on recycling waste, reducing energy 
consumption and emissions, and 
working with our supply base to ensure 
ethical sourcing.

Read more on Stakeholder
Engagement on pages 32 to 33

Employees

1,707

(FY19: 1,784)

  Store teams

  Head office and support teams

  Delivery and warehousing teams

Gross sales breakdown*

£268.1m

(FY19: £333.3m)

  Furniture (in-store)

  Online

  Flooring (in-store)

* 

 Gross sales represents turnover on the sale of goods 
and warranties before deduction of interest free credit 
(page 94)

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020Where we are
Over the past few years, we have focused on 
optimising our store footprint to ensure our 
estate is sustainable and efficient. We want  
to ensure that our stores are accessible and 
reach as many potential customers as possible.  
The right store in the right location works  
hand-in-hand with having great people,  
great product, excellent service and value. 

We currently trade from 100 stores across the UK – from Aberdeen  
to Plymouth, and believe the reach offered by our existing and targeted 
network is optimum to meet customer demand, whilst ensuring we  
make an appropriate return. As customer shopping habits evolve  
and the demand for online shopping increases, we are able to support  
our physical estate through offering all of our ranges on our website. 

3

A new website was launched this summer, with increased speed, 
mobile optimisation and functionality. This has been coupled with other 
improvements including increased product visualisation. The progress 
made in our online capability allows customers not only to purchase  
with more confidence online but perform detailed research before  
visiting one of our stores. Our statistics show that our online sales are 
complementary to our stores, attracting a different customer base.  
The retail network is then further supported by nine strategically  
placed regional distribution centres.

Our stores and distribution centres

  Stores 

  Distribution

Stores across the UK

Distribution centres

100

9

Average retail space per store

14,374 sq ft

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
Delivering our Values

 Responsive

4

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020To our customers, 
colleagues, markets and 
new ways of working

Our product range is carefully selected with our customers at the 
forefront of our procurement decisions and during the year we continued 
to respond to the latest customer demands by launching over 100 new 
products across our furniture and flooring ranges. 

Ahead of re-opening our stores we wanted to make sure that our 
customers felt safe and we understood that they would prefer to avoid 
queues, therefore we introduced an appointment system. Customers are 
now able to book a convenient time slot at any our 100 stores, giving them 
dedicated time in our branches with a member of the sales team. As well as 
benefiting our customers, the system has resulted in increased conversion 
rates and positive customer feedback on Trustpilot. 

Throughout lockdown it was important that we were still able to respond 
to aftercare issues for our customers. Our team of technicians adapted to 
working from home and were able to carry out virtual product inspections 
using video conferencing software.

5

 “We recently launched our own ‘Inspire’ 
brand in response to our customers’ 
desire for a classic, timeless and 
stylish range. We understand that our 
customers want their home to be as 
individual as they are, which is why we 
offer a superior range of famous sofa 
brands to suit all tastes. Ensuring we 
offer the right products at the right  
price is key to what we do.”

Melissa Maddison 
Merchandising manager

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSWorking and 
communicating with  
each other to achieve 
common goals

Ensuring that our people feel connected to the business and part of the 
ScS community is key to our success, and this was especially important 
during lockdown. Through our increased internal communication 
channels, including weekly emails and regular team video conferences, we 
made sure that everyone was kept up to date on the latest developments. 

As we knew it was vital to get our colleagues opinions on our approach 
to re-opening, we created an interactive forum so that they could share 
their views, had the latest information at their fingertips and were able to 
communicate with other colleagues, sharing their concerns or even their 
latest lockdown DIY projects! 

Our teams worked tirelessly in the first week of lockdown to ensure all our 
customers were personally contacted and updated on their order status. 
This was followed by regular communications to provide reassurance.  
Our care and consideration has been reflected in positive Trustpilot reviews. 

6

We recognise the importance of having an efficient, resilient and high 
quality supply chain as we continue to grow together. As part of our 
commitment to these partnerships, all our suppliers received full payment 
during lockdown, enabling us to work quickly with them to deliver orders 
as we re-opened. We continue to work collaboratively to ensure our 
customers receive the best product at the right price. 

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 20207

Delivering our Values

 Inclusive

 “During lockdown ScS supported me to set up and run an ScS 
team radio station. I thoroughly enjoyed being able to provide 
support and entertainment to my colleagues during such a 
challenging time. With more than 900 people tuning in it was 
great to stay connected and boost morale! I’m very proud to 
be a part of the ScS community.”

Paul Hillier
Sales Professional at our Plymouth store

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSDelivering our Values

 Get it 
 right

8

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020Doing things right  
first time

We know that at times balancing the challenges of work and home life 
can be difficult, that’s why our colleague’s mental health and wellbeing 
is of utmost importance to us. We have teamed up with an external 
organisation to offer support to our people through a free, confidential 
employee assistance programme, available 24/7. 

To further enhance the support available, we have also trained 32 of our 
people to become mental health first aiders, and our senior managers 
have participated in mental heath awareness training, so that if anyone 
needs extra support they can turn to a trained colleague for help.

Ahead of re-opening our stores and distribution centres, risk assessments 
were carried out for all of our main operational processes and activities to 
ensure the safety and wellbeing of our colleagues and customers. Our risk 
assessments are published on our plc website. 

Teams were issued with a ‘Safety First’ booklet which contained details 
of the new measures which were to be implemented, such as one way 
systems, deep cleaning procedures and checks to be performed  
before entering a customer’s home for our distribution crews, flooring 
surveyors and technicians. COVID-19 specific mandatory training was 
rolled out across the business and PPE was made available alongside  
a demonstration video of how to use it effectively.

9

 “Asking for help and offering a helping 
hand when it’s needed is part of what 
our ‘get it right’ value is all about. With 
the psychological impact of COVID-19 
leading to elevated levels of stress and 
anxiety, it was more important than  
ever for us to focus on mental health  
and wellbeing.”

Hannah English 
Engagement and Internal Communications 

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSPassionate, committed 
and driven with a winning 
attitude

The creation of our new customer experience support team allows 
our customers to benefit from a dedicated team available for a wider 
timeframe. The new team has embraced their roles and are committed  
to providing an efficient and consistent service. 

We were quick to respond to the COVID-19 pandemic and move staff, 
where possible, to work from home ahead of the government imposed 
lockdown. Our people quickly adapted to their new way of working, utilising 
video conferencing and other communication channels. Teams went the 
extra mile to ensure that they had regular catch ups and that much needed 
interaction with others!

10

Our e-commerce team have been working hard on our new website which 
launched in July 2020. Given the increased activity via our website during 
the year it was vital that the transition was managed effectively, requiring 
careful preparation and planning. Our dedicated team of experts have 
made significant improvements to our website, including increasing speed, 
improving navigation and user experience for mobile devices, enhanced 
information showcasing our products, and increased functionality in the 
check-out process for customers.

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020Delivering our Values

 Hard 
working

11

 “Working from home was a new concept for 
a lot of my colleagues and my main focus 
was to ensure that they had an appropriate 
workstation that complied with our health 
and safety guidelines. I performed virtual 
assessments and offered advice on how  
they could make their space more suitable.”

Mark Forster 
Health and Safety Officer

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSDelivering our Values

Trusted

12

 “Thank you so much to ScS for this 
very generous donation. It is much 
appreciated and will help us to  
support those in food poverty.”

Gateshead Foodbank

 “We are really grateful for organisations 
like yours stepping up at this time.”

Loughborough Foodbank

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020Operating with fairness, 
respect, honesty  
and integrity

As a trusted and responsible employer we take our commitment to our 
people very seriously and we strive to support and reward our colleagues 
as best we can. The Board took the decision to top up the basic pay  
of those furloughed to 100% so that no one was financially impacted 
during these already challenging times. 

With over 230,000 Trustpilot reviews our customers take comfort in  
the positive experience of others and recognising that they are shopping 
with a trusted business. Throughout the year we have maintained our 
‘Excellent’ Trustpilot rating and continuously monitor our reviews to  
reward our teams and identify any areas for improvement. 

With demand for food bank support being unprecedented during 
lockdown, ScS supported the Trussell Trust by donating £48,000 to the 
food banks located closest to each of our 100 stores. We recognise the 
importance of supporting our local communities and we are proud to  
have been able to support such a great cause and make a difference.

13

Trustpilot rating

Excellent

ScS donation to food banks closest to our 100 stores

£48,000

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSOur Business Model

Creating value and choice 
for our target market

A high quality, value-led range of products, supported by an expert 
team, modern stores, and an efficient supply chain, providing 
outstanding value, quality and choice for our customers.

Our key ingredients

Range of price points
From £299 to £5,295, 
creating value and choice  
for our customers.

14

Easy ways to pay
Long-term  
interest-free credit  
making buying affordable.

Brands
Long-term relationships 
with leading furniture  
and flooring brands.

Service 
‘Excellent’ Trustpilot rated 
service delivered by our 
passionate and caring team.

On key retail parks
High quality stores  
in prime locations.

Online
Showcasing product  
and a rapidly growing  
sales platform.

Product

In-store expertise

What we do
We offer a wide range of designs and famous 
brands across our furniture and flooring ranges, 
all at price points that deliver great value.

Our furniture products are made-to-order  
and tailored to meet our customers’ needs. 

Our flooring offering ranges from carpets and 
rugs to laminate and luxury vinyl tiling. There is 
something for everyone.

Working closely with our suppliers allows us to 
target key price points and offer our products  
at the best possible value.

What we do
Across our 100 stores we offer our customers 
the opportunity to purchase their furniture and 
flooring under one roof and help to make their 
house a home.

Our dedicated sales teams are on hand to help 
the customer choose the right product for them 
within our large, modern stores.

We provide a free surveying service so flooring 
customers can be assured that they have 
ordered the correct size and quantity of floor 
covering for their home.

How we do it
We carefully select our suppliers and source 
from a small group of specialists, mainly  
UK-based suppliers, most of whom we  
have worked with for many years, building  
strong relationships.

Our size ensures we are key to all of our 
suppliers, ensuring our customers benefit  
from our demands for value and quality.

To give our customers flexibility we offer 
interest-free credit across all of our products.

To ensure our customers purchase the right 
flooring for their home we offer a free flooring 
sample service. 

How we do it
Our ‘home of brands’ vision allows our customer 
to browse our stores and envisage our products 
in their home, with complimentary furniture  
and flooring products displayed together.

Trustpilot reviews allow us to ensure we monitor 
and improve what we offer, and our ‘Excellent’ 
rating reassures our teams and our customers 
that we are doing a great job.

We have fully integrated our in store sales 
app, nYwhere, into the business to improve 
the ordering process. We have also added 
functionality to allow carpet surveyors to 
complete orders in the customer’s home.

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020 “We have a clear vision to be Britain’s 
best value sofa and carpet retailer.” 
Alan Smith
Chairman

Website

Delivery

Customer experience

15

What we do
Our store network is supported by our new 
mobile and tablet friendly transactional website.

With improved computer generated imagery 
(CGI) of our products and a more efficient 
checkout process, our website allows 
customers the chance to browse our  
products at their leisure and convenience.

We have introduced an electronic ‘contact us’ 
form to allow our customers to contact us  
24 hours a day, seven days a week, at a time  
and location convenient to them.

What we do
We offer a two-man home delivery and 
installation service for our furniture products, 
and a full fitting service for our flooring range.

Our delivery teams provide customers with  
an efficient and friendly service, taking pride in 
their work and having respect and consideration 
for our customers’ homes.

Working with our fitting partners our flooring 
is cut, delivered and fitted to our customers’ 
specifications.

How we do it
Our full product portfolio, clear pricing, detailed 
product information and buying guides ensure 
our customers have a first class experience, 
whether looking to buy online or simply using  
the site to research and view our great products 
and offers, prior to visiting a store.

We have introduced web-only products as we 
recognise the needs of our online customers 
may differ to those who chose to come in store.

How we do it
From our nine distribution centres operating 
across the UK, our delivery teams ensure  
that customers receive their furniture in  
a timely manner.

Our two-man home delivery operation uses 
electronic proof of delivery software which 
integrates with our core system, giving  
our teams real-time visibility and improving 
query resolution.

What we do
We have a dedicated, central customer 
experience team who have the tools, knowledge 
and technology to ensure we can resolve  
our customers’ queries quickly. The team  
are available to provide assistance seven  
days a week.

Our team of highly skilled service technicians, 
and flooring surveyors, are on hand to visit 
customers’ homes to take care of any issues 
arising after delivery or fitting.

Our dynamic appointment scheduling 
system allows us to offer the earliest possible 
appointment to a customer, which can include  
a same day service.

How we do it
Utilising contact centre technology and a 
job optimisation solution, our team is able to 
manage customer enquiries and our service 
technician appointments. These appointments 
are scheduled to give the shortest possible  
wait times, ensuring that our customers  
benefit from an efficient service.

Our service technicians benefit from support 
tools which allows them to electronically submit 
high quality, media rich reports which means 
that our aftercare team can respond quickly  
to their recommendations and we can feedback 
to our suppliers to ensure product quality 
continues to improve.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSOur Markets

16

Potential 
opportunity 
in a recovering 
but uncertain 
market

-22.1% 
Forecast 2020 market size: Furniture*

£2,462m

-29.1% 
Forecast 2020 market size: Flooring*

£1,403m

* source GlobalData (as of 1 Sept 2020)

Current UK market
We operate in both the 
furniture and flooring markets.

Market commentary
The latest analysis of the upholstery market 
from GlobalData suggests a 0.7% reduction  
in the size of the market in 2019 will be followed 
by a further 22.1% fall in 2020. Their view is 
that 2020 initially began relatively buoyantly, 
but this growth was interrupted in March by 
COVID-19 and the national lockdown, with 
consumers deferring non-essential purchases 
and whilst online orders grew significantly, the 
relatively small proportion of the market that 
is transacted via the web meant this increase 
was not able to counterbalance the closure of 
stores. Pent-up demand occurred as customers 
emerged from lockdown in a more cash-rich 
position, spending money that was previously 
earmarked for holidays and other leisure 
activities on home improvements. GlobalData 
predict that customers have brought forward 
purchases and forecast market conditions 
will become challenging with the developing 
COVID-19 pandemic, the end of the current 
furlough scheme at the end of October, and 
the end of the EU transition period. GlobalData 
are forecasting that the 22.1% decline in 2020 
will largely reverse in 2021, with the market 

forecasted to be down 2% when compared to 
2019. By 2025, the market is forecast to be 5.6% 
higher than 2019.

GlobalData analysis on the floorcoverings 
market suggest that following growth of 0.9% in 
2019, it will be one of the hardest hit sub-sectors 
within retail in 2020. Their commentary outlines 
that lockdown prevented the measurements 
and installation of flooring, and encouraged 
shoppers to be more considered with non-
essential purchases. Unlike other sectors, 
flooring did not transfer online, and the weak 
housing market for the past two years had 
already stunted growth. There has been a 
slight recovery in demand since the end of 
lockdown, and the stamp-duty holiday has 
also encouraged more people to move house, 
however as with other big-ticket purchases, 
GlobalData highlight that potential restrictions 
on installers entering customer’s homes, the 
end of the furlough scheme and concerns over 
job security will lead customers to hold off  
on making bit ticket purchases. GlobalData are 
forecasting a 29.1% fall in the floorcoverings 
market in 2020 with 2021 recovering to 2% 
below the 2019 market. By 2025, the market  
is forecast to be 5.8% higher than 2019.

Key drivers
Both of our core markets are heavily influenced 
by similar key factors:

Consumer confidence
Big ticket sales are usually heavily affected by 
consumer confidence, which has reached new 
lows as COVID-19 has impacted worldwide. 
GfK* reported that, with the pandemic’s 
potential affect on years of job security, 
employment was the biggest concern for 
consumers. Consumer confidence as reported 
in the GfK Consumer Confidence Index has 
fallen to -27 in August 2020, down from -14 in 
August 2019. Recent post-lockdown trading 
suggests that the impact on our markets 
appears to be balanced by a change in consumer 
spending attitude, where a reduction in ability 
to spend on holidays in 2020, has allowed for 
increased spending on home furnishings. 

Housing market
A house move triggers the purchase of 
new flooring and furniture for many of our 
customers. Since a peak in 2016 (the highest 
number since 2007), housing transactions 
have continued to fall each year, with total 
transactions for 2019 4.5% lower than the 
2016 peak. The impact of COVID-19 halted the 
housing market entirely during mid-2020, and 
total transactions to August 2020 are 25.1% 
lower when compared to the same period in the 
prior year. Post-lockdown, pent-up demand for 
house moves, a temporary stamp duty freeze, 
as well as wider behavioural shifts as people 
re-assess their housing needs, including a shift 
towards more home working, initially appear to 
have encouraged a rapid recovery to the market, 
although this may be temporary in nature.

* GFK Consumer Confidence Index, August 2020

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020 
 
Consumer confidence

-24.8

Housing market

-25.1%

Availability of consumer credit

+0.7%

2015

2016

2017

2018

2019

YTD
AUG
2020

(24.8)

3.1

(3.3)

(8.8)

(9.5)

(12.7)

2015

2016

2017

2018

2019

YTD
AUG
2020

1.23m

+0.3%

2015

+7.7%

1.23m

+0.5%

2016

1.22m

-0.8%

2017

+10.1%

+10.3%

1.19m

-2.8%

2018

+9.2%

1.18m

-1.1%

2019

+6.5%

-25.1%

+0.7%

YTD
JUL
2020

GfK Consumer Confidence Index – Average of 
individual scores for each year. Research carried  
out by GfK on behalf of the European Commission.

HMRC UK Property Transaction statistics –  
Total of number of residential property transactions 
completions with a value over £40,000 within the UK, 
seasonally adjusted.

Bank of England – Average 12 month growth rate  
for the calendar year of total (excluding the Student 
Loans Company) sterling net consumer credit lending 
to individuals (in percent), seasonally adjusted.

Availability of consumer credit
With nearly half of our customers choosing to 
utilise our finance options to pay for their products, 
the availability of consumer credit helps facilitate 
sales, and provide opportunities for upselling. Early 
2020 continued to show growth of net consumer 
credit lending, albeit slower than that seen in 
recent years. However, availability is now reported 
as beginning to reduce from May 2020 onwards.

Our place  
in the market
Increasing market share
Although the market remains volatile, our strong 
re-opening performance, together with the 
loss of some competitors during the lockdown 
period suggests we continue to grow market 
share. GlobalData estimate that our upholstery 
market share has increased from 7.9% in 2013  
to 9.8%, and our flooring market share increased 
from 1.6% to 2.8%, over the same time frame.

Value retailer
We recognise what we do best, and believe our 
customers recognise this too. Our continued 
focus on our key strengths ensures we have  
a strong and growing reputation for delivering 
consistently great value, and the continued 
growth in our market share in upholstery 
and floor coverings demonstrates this. Our 
refreshed strategy will continue to support this.

Opportunities for further growth
The online market has grown significantly through 
2020, both as a result of the closure of physical 
stores, and through the desire of people to shop 
from the safety of their own homes. Our new 
website and the continued improvements planned 
should allow us to continue the significant growth 
we have experienced already. As the economic 
recovery begins, our focus is to continue to provide 
value, quality and choice for our customers and 
appeal strongly to a broad demographic of aspiring 
homemakers, families and retired couples.

2020 upholstery market share*

2020 floor coverings market share*

17

9.8%

2.8%

  ScS

  Other

  ScS

  Other

2019 market share: 9.4%

2019 market share: 2.5%

Retailer

DFS

ScS

Sofology

Furniture Village

IKEA

Next

Made.com

John Lewis

Argos

Wayfair

2019 (%)

2020e (%)

Retailer

2019 (%)

2020e (%)

24.8
9.4
7.5
5.6
5.3
3.9
2.0
2.3
1.8
1.0

28.1
9.8
8.0
6.2
5.6
4.0
3.1
2.1
2.0
1.7

Carpetright

B&Q

Tapi

Wickes

Dunelm

United Carpets

IKEA

Amazon

John Lewis

ScS

15.6
6.2
5.0
4.9
3.3
3.3
2.8
1.9
3.4
2.5

16.0
6.0
5.8
4.5
4.0
3.7
3.5
3.1
3.0
2.8

* Market share data provided by GlobalData

Our advantages in the market

Our continued aim to provide a value proposition at a range of price points allows us to offer best-in-class 
prices to customers searching for the best deal. 

Our product offering has continued to evolve in line with our strategy to broaden our appeal by offering 
a wider range of brands – including third-party brands – as well as flooring, dining and occasional ranges. 
Flooring now represents 11.4% of total gross sales.

Our partnerships with multiple finance houses ensure competitive tension and drive the best cost prices 
and levels of acceptance for our finance offerings.

Our strategy targets the key areas we believe will improve our position in the industry in the coming years. 
There is still considerable room to grow our market share in both furniture and flooring.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSChairman’s Letter

18

Following a number of years 
of building the Group’s 
profitability and resilience, 
I write this report very 
proud at how well the 
business has responded to 
a year that could not have 
been predicted. I am very 
fortunate to chair a team 
who personify our values, 
and never has the strength 
of teams in a business been 
more important than in this 
unprecedented time. 

-19.5% 

Gross sales

£268.1m

Underlying EPS

2.6p

-91.4% 

-0.4% 

Gross margin % of gross sales

44.6%

Dear Shareholder,

This report covers our 2019/20 financial year, 
which ended 25 July 2020 and, whilst strategic 
progress was made throughout the year, our 
results are naturally dominated by the effects  
of the global outbreak of COVID-19 in the 
second half of the year. Our response to the 
impact of the pandemic is explained throughout 
this report. 

Overview
Despite such a challenging year, the Group and 
our people have remained committed to living 
by our RIGHT values. Whilst we go into this in 
further detail throughout the report, I am proud 
of our quick reaction into lockdown when our 
stores and distribution centres were required 
to close, our increased levels of communication 
with all of our customers and colleagues,  
our commitment to ensuring colleagues who 
were furloughed received full pay, and that  
we continued to pay all our supply partners on 
time and in full. Additionally, I was delighted we 
were able to provide support to 100 food banks 
across the UK during this challenging time. The 
planning and preparation for re-opening was  
a collaborative effort from our people, ensuring 
all concerns were taken into consideration, and 
above all prioritising the safety and wellbeing 
of our teams and customers. Throughout 
the year, my fellow board members and I have 
increased our visibility across the business, 

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020 
 
 
visiting stores upon re-opening, contributing to 
the weekly internal communications and leading 
companywide video conference calls. 

Financially, our efforts in previous years to build 
a strong and resilient business have been key 
to ensuring our continued success. As would 
be expected with such a tactile ‘big-ticket’ 
purchase, the temporary closure of our stores 
led to a material reduction in order intake and, 
whilst online bookings increased significantly, 
this could not offset the overall decline. We 
welcomed the government’s swift action in 
suspending business rates for a year and the 
support for continued employment through 
the job retention scheme. Our flexible cost base 
enabled the Group to minimise cash outflow 
over this critical time.

Our extensive planning, coupled with the way we 
communicated and looked after our customers 
and colleagues during lockdown, has played  
a key part in our performance since re-opening 
in late May, with order intake growth of 92.2% in 
the 9 weeks ending 25 July 2020. To finish the 
year with order intake down only 5.9%, despite 
our stores being closed for two months, is an 
outstanding result.

The year also saw the Group reach an important 
milestone with regards to its ownership structure. 
On 11 February, Parlour Products Holdings 
(LUX) S.A.R.L (‘Parlour’) sold its entire stake in 
the Group. Parlour owned the business prior to 
the flotation in January 2015 and had retained 
40.25% of the shareholding as at the start of 
the year. As part of this event, we were pleased 
to return value to our shareholders by acquiring 
and subsequently cancelling 2 million shares.

Dividends
Despite the strength of our balance sheet, the 
Board did not feel it was right to pay an interim 
dividend at a time when the economy was 
facing such uncertainty and that the Group 
was receiving government support. It seemed 
inappropriate to use the cash for anything 
other than protecting the financial strength 
and resilience of the business at such a crucial 
time. The Board recognises the importance 
of income to the Group’s shareholders and will 
continue to assess when it is sensible to  
re-commence dividend payments. 

Board
During the year, Paul Daccus, who was Parlour’s 
representative on the Board, resigned following 
their sale of its stake in the Group.

As previously announced, David Knight notified 
the Board of his intention to retire as Group CEO 
and has agreed he will not retire before the end 
of July 2021. The search for David’s replacement 
has commenced and we will provide a further 
update when appropriate.

Our culture
Listening & improving

As a Board we are committed to listening to our employees. We received many 
responses to the Group’s annual employee survey and are committed to:

 – Greater openness to change and a willingness to challenge the status quo;

 – Improved clarity on our key strategic objectives and prioritisation;

 – Enhanced communication to all levels of the business; and

 – Making ScS a great place to work.

19

re-opening and we remain focused on our 
vision to become Britain’s best value sofa and 
carpet retailer. The Board would like to thank 
our customers for their continued support and 
our colleagues for their ongoing dedication and 
professionalism.

ScS is a resilient business, with a strong balance 
sheet and a flexible cost base, and we are well 
positioned to navigate the challenges ahead and 
maximise opportunities as and when they arise. 

Alan Smith
Chairman
1 October 2020

I have been delighted with the ongoing support 
from my board colleagues in these challenging 
times. As might be expected, the board has 
met more frequently both as a board and with 
colleagues in the business to provide increased 
guidance, support and to share their knowledge 
and experience. 

Summary
Clearly, the year is not what we had planned or 
hoped for. Nevertheless, the performance and 
reaction of the team gives me every confidence 
that the business has all the attributes to 
continue to deliver in these uncertain times.  
I strongly believe that if the COVID-19 outbreak 
had not interrupted its progress, the Group would 
have been delivering results showing an increase 
in profits and resilience for the fifth year in a row.

Whilst it is too early to provide clarity on the 
outlook for the weeks and months ahead,  
we are encouraged with the trading seen since 

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSCEO’s Review

20

This year has been like no 
other in my 32 years with 
ScS. I am very proud of my 
team of colleagues, and 
with their help over the past 
few years we have built a 
resilient business that has 
been able to respond to and 
confidently manage the 
challenges of COVID-19. 

-63.5% 

Underlying EBITDA (pre IFRS 16)

£7.2m

+13.6% 

Online sales

£19.1m

-5.9% 

Order intake 

-5.9%

Overview
Throughout the year our priorities have been to 
support our colleagues, to continue to provide 
a high quality service to our customers and to 
protect the long-term success of our business.

During these unprecedented times, it’s been 
humbling to see how our people have embraced 
the change needed to adapt quickly to operating 
in new ways, and how they have shown an 
inspiring level of care and commitment to our 
customers, local communities and to their 
colleagues. It is a privilege for me to be part of 
this passionate and dedicated team, particularly 
as I begin my final year as CEO. 

Although there remains continued uncertainty 
in the wider UK economy, both in regards  
to the further impact of COVID-19, and the 
impending end of the Brexit transition period, 
the Group is positioned strongly, and our 
purpose remains unchanged, to provide  
an excellent customer experience with 
outstanding value, quality and choice.

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020 
 
 
Year in review
Autumn 
Early in the year, our nYwhere in-store sales 
app was fully integrated into the business to 
facilitate a streamlined sales ordering process. 
nYwhere allows our salespeople to complete 
an order from a tablet-friendly, intuitive and 
easy to navigate tile-based interface which links 
directly to our core system. Our customers have 
benefited from a simple step-by-step process, 
increased speed and order accuracy levels, 
and the convenience of receiving their order 
documents electronically.

Attracting, recruiting, developing and retaining 
the right people is key to our success. The retail 
regional and branch manager roles are critical 
as they lead the local store teams. Further 
developing these teams was identified as a great 
opportunity for investment and early in the year 
we enlisted the help of business coaches and 
former Olympians Steve Backley and Roger 
Black to deliver their ‘Olympic Experience’ 
training programme. We remain focused on 
investing in the development and wellbeing  
of our people, and helping our teams achieve 
their potential.

Results 
The two-month lockdown period from late 
March to late May meant deliveries to customers 
were temporarily paused. Due to this, the Group 
saw a £65.2m (19.5%) decrease in gross sales in 
the year to £268.1m (2019: £333.3m). In-store 
furniture sales decreased £55.2m (20.1%), in-
store flooring sales decreased £12.3m (29.2%), 
and online sales increased £2.3m (13.6%). 

The year started with a challenging autumn 
trading period, impacted by the ongoing 
low consumer confidence levels due to the 
uncertainty arising from Brexit and the political 
landscape. Following a level of Brexit clarity 
and the general election in December 2019, 
we enjoyed a successful winter sales period, 
returning to growth. This momentum increased 
in February and March and the Group was on 
track to deliver another year of growth before 
the UK went into lockdown, forcing temporary 
store closures and a suspension of deliveries. 
Encouragingly, since re-opening our stores at 
the end of May, the demand for our product has 
exceeded our expectations and we were very 
happy to be able to welcome our customers 
back into our stores for a safe shopping 
experience. Our delivery teams have also been 
working at full capacity to deliver orders placed 
before and during lockdown.

Gross profit decreased to £119.6m (2019: 
£149.9m), with the gross margin percentage 
falling slightly to 44.6% (2019: 45.0%). Pre-IFRS 
16 underlying EBITDA decreased to £7.2m 
(2019: £19.7m) and pre-IFRS 16 underlying profit 
before tax decreased to £1.8m (2019: £14.6m).

A transformative change for the business 
then followed, with the centralisation of 
administration from our individual stores to 
a dedicated central team. This step naturally 
followed the introduction of nYwhere, as the 
app removed the need for orders to be manually 
input into our system in-store. A specialist 
central customer experience team was created 
and customers now benefit from a larger team 
available for a wider timeframe, providing a more 
consistent service. On top of the efficiencies 
achieved, taking all support requests in to one 
team has enabled the business to identify  
areas where the customer journey can be 
further improved, which was more difficult  
when support was split across the UK in 100 
stores. This was a big change for the Group,  
as a number of the local administrators had  
been in the business for some time and we 
appreciate this was a significant period of 
change for our store teams. 

Compared to the prior year our bookings performance was as follows:

Period

Pre-lockdown

Lockdown

Post-lockdown

Full year

Weeks

1 to 34

35 to 43

44 to 52

1 to 52

Date

Order intake vs  
prior year

28 July 2019 to 21 March 2020

22 March to 23 May 2020

24 May to 25 July 2020

28 July 2019 to 25 July 2020

(4.2%)

(92.5%)

92.2%

(5.9%)*

* 

like-for-like order intake declined 6.0%.

21

Winter
The centralisation of administrative tasks 
was complete in late November, with the new 
processes and procedures rolled out across 
the whole network and the new customer 
experience team now established. This meant 
that throughout the key winter sales period  
our in-store teams were able to benefit from  
the use of the nYwhere app, focusing on 
maximising sales in-store and allowing the  
new central customer experience team  
to deal with customer queries. 

A review of the in-store space allocation and 
merchandising was also completed prior to the 
winter sales period. This identified opportunities 
to increase the product range in a number of 
our stores and the introduction of our ‘home 
of brands’ vision, resulting in a revised and 
improved customer journey in our stores, 
creating an increased concession feel across  
our key external and internal brand areas. 

This review led to greater consistency across 
our stores, including product placement, visual 
merchandising and range, with complimentary 
furniture and flooring products displayed 
together. Throughout the year, we were able to 
introduce and showcase new brands, including 
our ‘Inspire’ range followed by our ‘Living’ and 
‘Signature’ ranges. We continue to review our 
product offerings to meet our customer’s needs. 

Customer service remains a key focus area 
and our Trustpilot rating is testament to the 
continued work and efforts of our people 
alongside our continued investment in 
technology and processes to improve the 
customer journey. We were very proud to  
reach the 200,000 reviews milestone on 
Trustpilot and maintain our ‘Excellent’ rating. 

Investment in technology continued with the 
roll-out of Microsoft Power BI across our retail 
management teams. This mobile optimised  
tool allows instant drill down on performance 
from the Group view to region, store, sales 
person and order level detail by day, week,  
period and year. Managers are presented  
with a daily dashboard with KPIs highlighting  
key areas for opportunity.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTS22

CEO’s Review continued

In line with our ongoing investment in our 
e-commerce capability, our online sales team 
was also restructured and strengthened, which 
led to the implementation of further technology, 
which optimises sales campaigns and increases 
efficiencies and conversion rates of our 
telesales team.

The business also received support from the 
government in the form of:
 – Deferral of VAT, NI and PAYE payments 

(£6.1m);

 – Retail business rates holiday (£3.4m); and
 – Furlough scheme (£5.0m).

Spring
After a promising start in the second half of 
the year, our Far East suppliers were impeded 
by the initial outbreak of COVID-19 and they 
were forced to reduce their operations. As 
the outbreak spread across the world and to 
the UK, we began to see reduced footfall and 
order intake, and as a precautionary measure, 
on 17 March 2020, the Group drew down £12m 
from its revolving credit facility (RCF).

As the situation developed, a proactive 
decision was made by management for our 
head office-based support colleagues to work 
from home where possible. Following that 
initial action, on 23 March the UK government 
ordered the closure of all ‘non-essential’ retailers 
and lockdown measures were imposed. All 
operations across our stores and distribution 
centres were temporarily closed and our 
colleagues were asked to remain at home,  
with the safety of our people and customers 
being our main focus.

At the peak, over 1,400 employees were placed 
into furlough during the period when our stores 
and distribution centres were closed. We 
continued to demonstrate our commitment to 
our employees and took the decision to ensure 
all our colleagues received full pay during this 
challenging time. Additional holiday was also 
given to those who were needed to continue to 
support the business in recognition of their hard 
work as we all adjusted to new ways of working.

Increased internal and external communications 
were vital during this lockdown period in order 
to ensure all our customers and colleagues 
were kept informed. Within the first week of 
lockdown, our dedicated teams were able to 
directly contact over 25,000 customers who 
had placed orders and provide them with the 
latest information regarding their order and 
offer them reassurance. Internally, we increased 
our use of weekly communication emails, set up 
a companywide discussion forum, and even had 
a furloughed colleague voluntarily set up and run 
an ScS team radio station.

Cash management was an immediate priority 
for the business and, together with constant 
reforecasting and scenario modelling, a series  
of cost saving initiatives were implemented  
to protect the business, including:
 – Reductions in advertising costs, capital 

spend and bonuses;

 – Cancellation of the interim dividend;
 – Recovery of corporation tax instalments  

paid to date; and

 – Secured rent deferral agreements with  

our landlords.

These cost and cash flow actions enabled us  
to reduce our monthly cash operating costs in  
April and May. In the same period, the business 
re-negotiated the covenants with our bank 
on our existing £12m revolving credit facility 
allowing the Group to continue to have access  
to this funding line if the need arose.

The closure of our stores saw a shift in customer 
shopping habits as orders placed through our 
website increased significantly. Over April and 
May online orders were up 78%. 

During the lockdown, the team still working 
focused heavily on business improvement 
projects including the continued development 
of our new website. Detailed planning was 
completed in preparation for the re-opening 
of our stores and distribution centres, with 
the primary focus being on the safety of our 
colleagues and customers. 

Summer 
Our phased re-opening began on 23 May with 
our English stores, followed by Scottish stores 
on 5 June and finally our Welsh stores opened 
their doors on 22 June in line with government 
and legal guidance. Similarly, from 19 May 
our distribution activities gradually resumed. 
Ensuring the health and safety of our retail 
and distribution teams and our customers 
was paramount to us as we implemented 
our comprehensive re-start plan. All of our 
teams received training before business 
re-commenced with all locations carrying out 
detailed risk assessments prior to opening. 
These assessments are published on our 
corporate website. The layout and square 
footage of our stores allowed us to implement 
social distancing without compromising the 
customer experience. Our stores introduced  
a clearly marked one way system, hand sanitiser 
stations located throughout and deep cleaning 
protocols. Likewise, the teams at our distribution 
centres implemented new ways of working and 
delivery crews now take vigorous steps before 
arriving at customers’ homes. We also updated 
our website to include details of our in-store and 
delivery safety measures alongside videos of the 
new procedures in action. All of our colleagues 
have been supplied with the necessary 
personal protective equipment (PPE) including 
facemasks, visors, disposable gloves and anti-
bacterial wipes. 

To help manage customer flow and the 
number of people in store we also introduced 
an appointment system to allow customers a 
specific time slot with a dedicated salesperson, 
removing the need for a customer to queue. 

The appointment system also had noticeable 
benefits on our in-store conversion. The 
steps we have taken have been very positively 
received by our customers, as can be seen 
through our Trustpilot reviews. 

Following the stores re-opening, we 
experienced very strong trading with order 
intake growth of 92.2% in the nine weeks ending 
25 July 2020, as we benefited from pent-up 
demand, and a willingness from our customers 
to spend on furnishings following extended 
periods in their homes. Our thorough advance 
planning, coupled with commitment to spend 
on brand awareness throughout lockdown, also 
enabled us to re-open quickly, and with impact, 
when we were given permission to do so, and  
we appeared to gain an advantage against some 
of our competitors, who took longer to fully 
re-open. We are confident in being able to use 
this base to grow our market share, particularly 
as our sector and the retail landscape changes in 
light of the challenging trading conditions. 

As we continue to respond to meeting the 
demands of our customers, throughout the 
year we have invested significantly in a new 
online sales platform which aims to improve 
the customer’s online journey by providing a 
more engaging checkout process, increased 
showcasing of our products (including our new 
online exclusive range) and clearer navigation 
for mobile devices. We have also significantly 
increased the level of computer generated 
imagery we do in-house, ensuring all models and 
colours are captured, allowing use across our 
nYwhere app, online, and on in-store displays. 
With online sales providing an ever increasing 
proportion of our overall sales, and a more 
important role than ever for our customers,  
we were excited to launch the new site and look 
forward to further enhancements that we can 
implement on our new mobile optimised site.

The COVID-19 outbreak has allowed us to take 
a step back and to consider how we do things 
as a company in terms of culture, work habits 
and in our day-to-day operations. For example, 
the increased activity through the website 
has seen us introduce web-only products and 
reinforced the importance of a strong online 
presence. We also appreciate that these are 
truly unprecedented times and our colleagues 
have had to adapt to new ways of working and 
to re-adjust back into their work routines. With 
this in mind we have trained 30 employees to 
become mental health first aiders to support 
our people post-lockdown. 

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020Despite the uncertainty, our value-led 
proposition is underpinned by a strong balance 
sheet, and our clear offering has continued 
to prove successful. We are confident it will 
continue to appeal to our customers who want  
to buy great products at the lowest possible price.

David Knight
Chief Executive Officer 
1 October 2020

Current trading and outlook
Trading since the start of the new financial year 
has remained strong, with like-for-like order 
intake growth of 45.8% for the nine weeks 
to 26 September 2020. We believe current 
performance has continued to benefit from 
pent-up demand and an increased investment 
by UK consumers in their homes. This growth 
has significantly exceeded our expectations  
and the Board continues to be encouraged  
by recent trading.

We are delighted with the strong trading since 
the start of the new financial year. However, we 
are now entering our key autumn trading period 
and it remains difficult to predict the potential 
impact of the increased economic uncertainty, 
including the cessation of the government’s 
Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS)  
at the end of October.

Delivering value for over 100 years

2010

Expanded our range to  
include occasional tables  
and dining furniture 

G Plan was added to our  
third-party brand range

2015

Listed on the London Stock 
Exchange in January

Opened three new ScS stores in 
Abbotsinch, Slough and Croydon

Our first own-brand, SiSi Italia, 
was introduced

2016

2011

5-star ‘Excellent’ rating achieved 
on independent customer review 
site Trustpilot 

Began to offer interest-free credit 
on all products in every store

One new store opened in 
Bromborough

1894

We commenced trading in 
Sunderland as a family-owned 
general home furnishings  
store, under the name  
‘Suite Centre Sunderland’

1980

We grew to operate from eight 
stores in the North East of 
England under the ScS brand

1993

Following a management buyout, 
we began to expand outside 
of the North East of England, 
opening in regional clusters 
across the UK

2012

Expanded to add flooring  
to the ScS range

Re-branded as ‘ScS, the Sofa 
Carpet Specialist’

2007

Our store expansion programme 
saw the store estate grow to 95 
stores nationwide

2013

We added Endurance, our second 
own-brand, to the range

2009

Launched a transactional  
online website

La-Z-Boy, the first third-party 
brand, was added to the ScS 
product range

2014

Launched our new website 
to provide enhanced online 
shopping experience

House of Fraser  
concessions launched

2017

Four new store openings: 
Aberdeen, Thanet, Edinburgh 
(Straiton) and Plymouth

5-star Trustpilot rating 
maintained and overall  
score improved 

Tetrad became the latest  
brand to be added to the range

2018

One new store opening in 
Chelmsford

First furniture retailer to reach 
100,000 Trustpilot reviews –  
with a 5-star ‘Excellent’ rating

First UK company to  
be accredited with FIRA  
certified compliance

Interiors Monthly, Flooring 
Retailer of the Year

23

2019

Launched our nYwhere app 

Refit of flooring department  
in every store

Built our own in-house 
photography studio

Exited House of Fraser 
concessions

2020

New store opened in Kirkcaldy

Reached 200,000 reviews  
on Trustpilot, one of only four 
companies in the UK to reach  
this milestone

Created a specialist centralised 
customer experience team

Introduced new brands as part 
of our ‘home of brands’ vision: 
‘Signature’, ‘Inspire’ and ‘Living’  
(all ScS brands)

Effective handling of the 
challenges of COVID-19 

Launched our new website

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
Our Strategy

Focusing on seven priorities

Our strategy is structured around seven key priorities, 
each of them with defined short and long-term goals  
to enable us to achieve our vision: Becoming Britain’s 
best value sofa and carpet retailer, making it easy for  
our customers to love their home.

01. 

Building and inspiring  
an outstanding team

By putting our people at the heart of our business, we aim to 
ensure they help us deliver an excellent customer experience. 
We are focused on creating a great place to work, recognising  
the contribution individuals make and creating opportunities  
for progression and development.

How
By having the best team in our sector.

24

02. 

Delivering an exceptional 
customer experience

Consumers today are better informed, more demanding and 
have greater freedom to choose who they buy from. Giving  
our customers an excellent buying experience is central  
to our purpose, values and critical to our success.

How
By relentless focus on customer experience.

What we’ve done
 –

Implement a more structured retail management development programme, 
providing greater support and guidance to our branch and regional  
management teams

 – Strengthened our learning and development and HR teams by the recruitment 

 –

 –

of additional field-based business partners
Listened to the feedback given in our annual employee survey and  
implemented changes
Enhanced employee communications across the network, including the use  
of social media, video and weekly news updates

Improve induction plans across the business

What we’re going to do
 – Continue the increased investment in the development of managers and teams
 –
 – Re-define and re-launch employee engagement and communication activities
 – Change our approach to employee surveys, with the aim of getting more 
frequent and tailored feedback from the different areas of the business
 – Move to a more flexible working environment to provide greater support  

across our retail and distribution network

What we’ve done
 – Continued to focus on Trustpilot and increased our use of customer feedback  

to maintain and improve our TrustScore

 – Centralised and strengthened customer support, extending support hours  

 –

 –

and increasing customer service
Introduced a customer enquiry web portal, allowing customers greater flexibility 
in how they choose to contact us
Implemented social distancing across our stores, helping the customer feel  
at ease whilst shopping

What we’re going to do
 – The centralisation of customer support has allowed the business to identify 

areas for improvement in the customer journey
 – Targeting further product quality enhancements
 –
 – More pro-active customer communications

Extending customer support hours

03. 

Optimising our  
product strategy

We want to ensure that our customers are able to choose from  
a wide selection of products that offer value for money at a range 
of price points. Our mix of core, in-house and famous brands 
offers something for everyone.

How
By sourcing the best value products.

What we’ve done
 – Rolled out our ‘home of brands’ vision, creating branded ‘mini-showrooms’  

 –

 –

and allowing consistency across the network
Launched new products to increase our product offering and showcased our 
newest brands, ‘Inspire’, ‘Signature’ and ‘Living’
Introduced web exclusive products, recognising the different requirements  
of online shoppers

 – Continued focus on product value, including promotions and enhancements 

What we’re going to do
 – Product range review (of both upholstered furniture and dining and occasional 

tables) to maximise market share opportunities

 – Review of supplier capacity and quality to ensure we continue to exceed 

customer expectations

 – Consideration of products with shorter lead times

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 202004. 

Driving sales densities  
in our ScS network

In a challenging marketplace where competition between 
retailers is tougher than ever, we will strive to create a shopping 
experience which ensures our customers feel confident in 
choosing to purchase with us.

How
By having modern stores in great locations.

What we’ve done
 – Reviewed in-store layouts and model ranges as part of our ‘home of brands’  

 –

 –

 –

roll out
Implemented individual branch business plans (supported  
by Power BI analytics) to identify and deliver greater returns
Launched new training aids for our sales teams, giving them the latest  
product information to increase their knowledge and confidence
Introduced store appointments to enhance customer service and increase 
conversion levels

What we’re going to do
 –

Increase in store visualisation with the implementation of new point of sale 
material and the increased use of in store media

 – Removal of redundant store office space to allow increased range size  

 –

in all stores
Enhance the performance management framework to help support  
staff development

 – Trial the use of technology in smaller footprint stores to allow customers  

to see the full range

05. 

Creating a market-leading 
website and increasing 
digital awareness

What we’ve done
 –
 –

Launched a new ‘mobile first’ website
Increased product visualisation by utilising our in-house photography studio  
and CGI image experts
Implemented new campaign management into our telesales team, optimising 
conversion and efficiencies

 –

Continued success will increase website new visitor count, online 
sales, and improve the quality of store footfall, with consumers 
increasingly using websites to research products prior to making 
a purchase. Consumers are also becoming more comfortable  
buying ‘big ticket’ items online.

What we’re going to do
 –
 –
 –

Further enhance product visualisation tools, including 360° image technology
Improve the online customer journey by streamlining the finance journey
Increase online integration to core systems to improve productivity and time 
spent on value add activities

How
By providing an excellent omnichannel offering.

25

06. 

Accelerating our  
flooring growth

With a range that rivals our largest flooring competitors, 
together with our recognised brand and excellent customer 
service, we have a great platform to continue to take  
market share.

How
By having a market-leading flooring offering.

07. 

Improving our  
profitability

We continue to focus on increasing the Group’s profits, margins 
and resilience, whilst maintaining the flexible cost base.

How
By running a lean and efficient business model.

What we’ve done
 – Continued increase in our online sample service
 –

Increased our flooring specific training for our sales teams to aid product 
knowledge and conversion

 – Worked with our suppliers to improve service levels and product offerings

What we’re going to do
 –

Enhance product range, introducing a greater range of carpets and other 
flooring products
Increase promotional activity in the flooring range

 –
 – Streamline and improve the customer journey, including process and  

technology changes

What we’ve done
 –

Implementation of Power BI reporting to allow dynamic analysis of critical  
KPIs across our retail network
Full tender programme for areas of non-product spend 
Improved management focus, including better reporting, has led to  
a reduction in stock held across the business

 –
 –

What we’re going to do
 –
 –
 – Roll out of Power BI across other parts of the business

Further technology enhancements to increase business efficiency
Implementation of changes to the warranty product in line with FCA guidelines 

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSKey Performance Indicators

The Group’s strategy remains key  
to the Group’s future success

Overview
Key performance indicators (KPIs) are 
fundamental to understanding the progress we 
are making with our strategy, and to monitor the 
ongoing performance of the business over time. 
The KPIs set out in this summary are the most 
relevant measures monitored on an ongoing 
basis by the Board. 

The definition of these KPIs and our 
performance over the last three years is 
detailed below, as well as how each KPI links to 
our strategic priorities. Commentary on these 
KPIs is contained within the financial review. All 
KPIs have been restated to include continuing 
operations only.

26

Financial KPIs

Total year-on-year gross sales

£268.1m

Like-for-like order intake growth

-6.0%

2018

2019

2020

£327.5m

£333.3m

2018

2019

0.4%

4.2%

£268.1m

2020

-6.0%

Why it’s important
Sustainable growth in delivered sales is key to our  
long-term success, increasing market share and 
creating opportunities.

What we measure
Gross sales is a measure taken directly from our 
primary statement of accounts, and is the combined 
total of all furniture and flooring delivered sales made, 
excluding VAT, both online and across all of our stores.

Why it’s important
Whilst overall delivered sales growth is important, 
understanding how the same stores perform year-on-
year provides a guide to underlying store performance. 
Due to lead times, order growth also gives a view as to 
future delivered sales performance.

What we measure
Like-for-like order growth compares year-on-year 
trading performance from comparable stores.  
It therefore excludes new and closed stores. Order 
value is a combined total of all furniture and flooring 
orders booked, including VAT, both online and across 
all of our stores.

Link to strategic priorities

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Link to strategic priorities

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Online sales

£19.1m

Gross margin % of gross sales

44.6%

2018

2019

2020

£13.8m

£16.8m

2018

2019

£19.1m

2020

45.0%

45.0%

44.6%

Why it’s important
The Group needs to maximise its share of customers 
wanting to transact online.

Why it’s important
To grow profitably, the Group must ensure that sales 
growth is supported by maintaining or growing the 
gross margin.

What we measure
Online sales growth is the portion of the gross sales 
figure as defined above, attributable to our online 
website and telesales.

What we measure
Gross margin % of gross sales is a measure taken 
directly from our primary statement of accounts,  
and is the total margin made from sale of product, 
excluding VAT, as a proportion of total gross sales.

Link to strategic priorities

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Link to strategic priorities

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020 “This year our KPIs reflect 
the significant impact 
COVID-19 has had on 
the business, and are 
not a true measure of 
the Group’s ability to 
deliver its strategy. The 
Board has outlined what 
we have done, and what 
we’re going to do, in the 
Our Strategy section on 
pages 24 and 25 and is 
comfortable the current 
strategy remains key 
to the Group’s future 
success.” 

David Knight
CEO

27

Non-Financial KPIs

Underlying EBITDA (pre IFRS 16)

Sales density per square foot

£7.2m

£184

2018

2019

2020

£19.1m

2018

£19.7m

2019

£224

£229

£7.2m

2020

£184

Why it’s important
EBITDA is a good indicator of the cash generation 
capability and direct profitability of the business.

What we measure
EBITDA is earnings before interest, tax, depreciation 
and amortisation, as well as any exceptional 
expenditure. We explain how this reconciles  
to profit before tax in the Financial Review.

Why it’s important
For our business to grow without increasing the store 
estate, we must generate increasing revenues in the 
trading space we currently occupy.

What we measure
Sales density per square foot takes total gross sales 
made, excluding VAT, divided by the trading space 
available across our store network.

Link to strategic priorities

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Link to strategic priorities

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Underlying Earnings per share (EPS)

Trustpilot customer satisfaction

2.6p

2018

2019

2020

2.6p

26.8p

30.3p

4.7

2018

2019

2020

4.6

4.6

4.7

Why it’s important
EPS is key to the business to understand the return 
being generated from profits to our shareholders.

What we measure
EPS is calculated by dividing profit attributable to 
shareholders by the average number of outstanding 
shares. The underlying measure excludes any 
exceptional items arising in the year.

Why it’s important
Customers want confidence that their retailer  
of choice can deliver on their promises. We focus  
on our TrustScore to ensure we maintain our  
‘Excellent’ rating.

What we measure
Our TrustScore, marked out of 5, is a measure  
provided by Trustpilot, an independent review platform 
used by our customers which asks them to rate our 
customer service.

Link to strategic priorities

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Link to strategic priorities

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTS+42.7% 

Cash

£82.3m

-20.2% 

Gross profit

£119.6m

Government support provided in 
response to COVID-19

£8.4m

Financial Review

28

The financial results for the 
year have been significantly 
impacted by the COVID-19 
pandemic. This disruption 
to deliveries had a material 
impact on sales and profits. 
The strong post-lockdown 
order intake recovery has 
resulted in a larger opening 
order book for the financial 
year ending 31 July 2021.

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020 
 
Gross sales 

Revenue

Gross profit

Distribution costs
Administration expenses before exceptionals and government support
Business rates relief
Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS)

Total operating expenses

Underlying operating profit
Exceptional items

Operating profit
Net finance (expense)/income

(Loss)/profit before tax
Tax

(Loss)/profit after tax

Underlying earnings per share

Year ended
25 July 2020
(Post-IFRS 16)
£m

Year ended 
25 July 2020
(Pre-IFRS 16)
£m

Year ended
27 July 2019
(IAS 17)
£m

268.1

255.5

119.6

(17.0)
(106.3)
3.4
5.0

(114.9)

4.7
(4.0)

0.7
(3.8)

(3.1)
0.9

(2.2)

2.6p

268.1

255.5

119.6

(17.4)
(108.9)
3.4
5.0

(117.9)

1.7
(3.2)

(1.5)
0.1

(1.4)
-

(1.4)

4.3p

333.3

317.4

149.9

(17.3)
(118.3)
–
–

(135.6)

14.3
(0.3)

14.0
0.3

14.3
(2.9)

11.4

30.3p

Underlying EBITDA from continuing operations

33.0

7.2

19.7

The financial statements for the year have been prepared under IFRS 16 on a modified retrospective basis. To aid comparability with the prior year,  
the table above shows the current year on both a post and pre-IFRS 16 basis.

29

Underlying EBITDA from continuing operations
An analysis of underlying EBITDA is as follows:

Underlying operating profit from continuing operations before government support
Government support

Underlying operating profit
Depreciation and amortisation

Underlying EBITDA from continuing operations

Exceptional costs

EBITDA from continuing operations

Year ended
25 July 2020
(Post-IFRS 16)
£m

Year ended
25 July 2020
(Pre-IFRS 16)
£m

Year ended 
27 July 2019
(IAS 17)
£m

(3.7)
8.4

4.7
28.3

33.0

(4.0)

29.0

(6.7)
8.4

1.7
5.5

7.2

(3.2)

4.0

14.3
–

14.3
5.4

19.7

(0.3)

19.4

Impact of IFRS 16 on the  
financial statements
The following financial information and 
commentary, unless otherwise stated, have 
been presented on a consistent accounting 
basis and do not reflect the impact of IFRS 16. 
The impact of the new standard on the Group 
financial statements is shown in note 2.

Overview
The financial results for the year have been 
significantly impacted by the COVID-19 
pandemic and the related national lockdown 
from late March to late May. Whilst we were 
pleased with the post-lockdown order intake 
recovery, which meant order intake finished the 
year only 5.9% below that seen in the previous 
financial year, the two-month national lockdown 
resulted in deliveries to customers being 
temporarily suspended. Gross sales, revenue 
and related profit is not recognised until orders 

are delivered, hence this disruption to deliveries 
had a material impact on sales and profits.  
The strong post-lockdown order intake recovery 
has resulted in a larger opening order book for 
the financial year ending 31 July 2021.

Gross sales and revenue
Gross sales decreased by £65.2m (19.5%) to 
£268.1m (2019: £333.3m) and is reflective of the 
period of closure of our store and distribution 
network following the government’s COVID-19 
response. The decrease is attributable to:
 – A decrease in furniture sales in stores of 
20.1% to £219.0m (2019: £274.2m);
 – A decrease in flooring sales in stores of 
29.2% to £30.0m (2019: £42.3m); and
 – An increase in online sales of 13.6% to 

£19.1m (2019: £16.8m).

Revenue, which represents gross sales less 
charges relating to interest-free credit sales (see 
note 3 – Segment information), also decreased 
by 19.5% to £255.5m (2019: £317.4m). This is 
again reflective of the period of closure of our 
store and distribution network in the second half 
of the year.

Gross profit
Gross margin (gross profit as a percentage of 
gross sales) decreased to 44.6% (2019: 45.0%). 
The decrease of 37 basis points is largely due to 
the increasingly promotional pricing and value 
offers which we feel are more important than 
ever, as consumers continue to seek value.  
The 44.6% gross margin achieved in the current 
year is in line with levels achieved by the business 
in the past few years. The lower volume  
year-on-year resulted in a decrease in gross 
profit of £30.3m (20.2%).

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSFinancial Review continued

30

Distribution costs
Distribution costs comprise the total cost of 
the in-house distribution function and includes 
employment costs, the cost of leasing vehicles 
and related running costs and property costs 
(principally rent, rates and utilities) for the nine 
distribution centres, as well as costs of third-
party delivery services contracted to support 
peak delivery periods. 

Distribution costs remained broadly in line with 
the prior year at £17.4m (2019: £17.3m). Property 
and staff-related costs increased, driven by cost 
pressures being seen in the logistics sector. This 
was largely offset by savings in relation to the 
reduced deliveries in the second half of the year. 

As a percentage of gross sales for the year, 
distribution costs were 6.5% (2019: 5.2%). 
As we have separately presented the CJRS 
claim, these costs do not include the related 
distribution employee salary savings obtained 
via the government grant scheme.

Administrative expenses  
before exceptional items and 
government support
Administrative expenses comprise:
 – Store operating costs, principally 

employment costs, property-related  
costs (rent and rates, utilities,  
store repairs and depreciation);

 – Marketing expenditure; and
 – General administrative expenditure, which 
includes the employment costs for the 
directors, senior management and all head 
office-based support functions and other 
central costs.

Administration costs for the year totalled 
£108.9m, compared to £118.3m in the prior year. 
Administrative costs were 40.6% of gross sales, 
up from 35.5% in the prior year.

There was an overall decrease in administrative 
costs of £9.4m, driven predominantly by a £6.4m 
reduction in performance related pay, a £2.0m 
reduction in marketing spend and a £1.6m fall  
in property and utility costs. 

Marketing costs decreased to £20.4m in the 
year (2019: £22.4m), as the business reacted 
quickly to the nationwide lockdown measures  
by deferring the planned spend on the key 
Easter and May bank holiday trading periods. 
During lockdown, investment was made in  
brand awareness by increasing TV sponsorship 
levels. Post-lockdown, we invested in a strong 
re-opening launch campaign which ran 
throughout June and July, a period in which 
historically marketing spend was at a minimum. 
This increased investment helped achieve  
the significant level of post-lockdown sales 
order growth.

Government support
During the year the Group has benefitted 
significantly from £8.4m of government support 
provided in response to the COVID-19 outbreak. 
This support is attributable to:
 – £5.0m received via the Coronavirus Job 

Retention Scheme (CJRS). This government 
grant provided support for 80% of 
employees’ payroll costs of over 1,400 
employees who were ‘furloughed’ during the 
period the Group’s operations were required 
to close. We took the decision to top-up the 
salaries of our colleagues to their normal 
levels in order to support them through such 
an unprecedented period. The last colleague 
was brought back from furlough on 1 August, 
and therefore the Group has had no further 
claims under the CJRS; and

 – £3.4m of retail business rates relief. Our retail 
property rates bill is a significant cost to the 
business, and the government’s response 
to the impact of COVID-19 to cut 100% of 
retail business rates bill for the 2020 to 2021 
tax year (1 April 2020 to 31 March 2021) has 
enabled a significant cash saving. As the 
Group continues to utilise this benefit into 
the new financial year, it expects to receive  
a further £7.2m benefit.

Flexible costs
The nature of the Group’s business model, 
where almost all sales are made to order, results 
in the majority of costs being proportional to 
sales. As demonstrated this year, this provides 
the business with the ability to flex its cost base 
as revenue changes, protecting the business 
should there be wider economic pressures.

Excluding government support and exceptional 
items, total costs before interest, tax, 
depreciation and amortisation across for the 
year were £269.3m (2019: £313.6m). Total 
costs fell £44.3m, largely as a result of the fall 
in variable costs, which, as expected, reduced 
in line with the decrease in turnover. As a 
consequence of the lower variable and total 
costs, semi-variable and fixed costs make up  
a slightly larger percentage of total costs when 
compared to previous years.

Of total costs, 72% (2019: 76%), or £194.5m 
(2019: £237.7m) are variable or discretionary,  
and are made up of:
 – £148.5m cost of goods sold, including 

finance and warranty costs (2019: £183.4m);

 – £17.4m distribution costs (2019: £17.3m);
 – £20.4m marketing costs (2019: £22.4m); and
 – £8.2m performance-related payroll costs 

(2019: £14.6m).

Semi-variable costs totalled £40.2m, or 15%  
of total costs, for the year (2019: £39.7m; 13%) 
and are predominantly other non-performance-
related payroll costs and store costs. Rent, rates, 
heating, and lighting make up the remaining 
£34.6m (13%) of total costs (2019: £36.2m; 11%).

The Group continues to maintain a low average 
remaining lease tenure on our store portfolio 
by ensuring the property portfolio is carefully 
managed and by targeting low tenures on  
lease renewals and on new stores. The majority 
of recent leases entered into are 10 years 
in length. This provides the business with 
increased flexibility to exit or relocate stores 
where required.

Underlying operating profit 
The operating profit before exceptional costs 
was £1.7m for the year, compared to £14.3m 
for the same period last year, driven by the 
£30.3m reduction in gross profit, partially offset 
by the decrease in operating costs and the 
benefit from government support. Without 
the additional government support, the Group 
would have recorded an underlying operating 
loss of £6.7m.

Exceptional costs
Exceptional items predominantly comprise of 
an impairment as a consequence of a cautious 
view on longer term store performance in a 
potentially weakened economic environment. 
Pre-IFRS 16, this £2.6m charge relates to 
impairment of the Group’s property plant 
and equipment. A £3.4m charge has been 
recognised as part of the Group’s results as 
presented under IFRS 16, in recognition of 
impairment to the Group’s property plant and 
equipment and right-of-use lease asset.

Exceptional costs also include amounts payable 
for redundancy costs incurred relating to the 
centralisation of administrative support from 
each of our individual stores to our head office  
in Sunderland.

Prior year exceptional costs relate to the 
professional fees in connection with the  
aborted acquisition of sofa.com, as announced 
in January 2019.

Taxation
Pre-IFRS 16, the tax credit for the financial year 
is lower (2019: higher) than if the standard rate of 
corporation tax had been applied, mainly due to 
the share based payment credit not included for 
tax purposes.

Loss/earnings per share (EPS) –  
Post IFRS 16
Basic underlying EPS for the year ended 25 July 
2020, which excludes exceptional costs, was 
2.6p compared to 30.3p in the previous year.

Statutory basic loss per share for the year ended 
25 July 2020 was 5.8p compared to an EPS of 
28.5p in the previous year.

A full reconciliation of EPS is shown in note 10.

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020 
 
Our people
The welfare of all colleagues and stakeholders 
is of paramount importance to the Group. 
We have implemented actions to protect the 
wellbeing of our teams, including significant 
changes across our stores, where their 
large layout and square footage enables 
us to implement social distancing without 
compromising the customer experience, 
together with supply of appropriate PPE, hand 
sanitiser stations located throughout and deep 
cleaning protocols. Our distribution centre 
and upholstery teams have implemented best 
practices for visiting customers, and many head 
office employees continue to work from home. 
We continue to minimise non-essential travel 
to Europe, the Far East and within the UK and 
we continually remind and train our colleagues 
of the need to maintain the highest possible 
standards of hygiene.

Our customers
Our customers have been very understanding 
of the trading environment the Group is 
operating in, and we have engaged well with 
them throughout the period impacted by 
COVID-19, with positive Trustpilot reviews 
reflecting their appreciation of the steps we 
have taken to ensure safety throughout the 
customer journey.

Our suppliers
All of our manufacturing suppliers have returned 
to operation. High order levels combined with 
new methods of working are applying pressure 
to lead times. There remains the further 
potential risk that one of the factories needs to 
close for a period of time, impacting our supply 
chain, creating delivery delays and lengthening 
product lead times further.

Chris Muir
Chief Financial Officer
1 October 2020

31

Cash and cash equivalents
Cash increased £24.6m in the year to £82.3m 
(2019: £57.7m). A summary of cash flows is 
shown below: 

Cash generated from operating activities
Payment of capital and interest elements of leases
Net capital expenditure
Net taxation and interest payments

Free cash flow
Dividends 
Purchase of own shares

Net cash generated

The business continued to be cash generative 
in the year with cash generated from operating 
activities of £59.5m (2019: £24.1m). However, it 
should be noted that the different presentation 
under IFRS 16 improves the reported number  
as a result of removing rent charges. On an  
IAS 17 comparable basis, cash generated from 
operating activities was £39.5m (2019: £24.1m). 

Of the £39.5m underlying cash generated from 
operating activities, £27.9m has been generated 
through improved working capital, largely 
reflecting the negative working capital business 
model whereby:
 – For cash/card sales, customers pay deposits 
at the point of order and settle outstanding 
balances before delivery;

 – For consumer credit sales, the loan  

provider pays ScS within two working days  
of delivery; and

 – The majority of product suppliers are paid at 
the end of the month following the month  
of delivery into the distribution centres.

Customer deposit balances have increased by 
£19.9m in the year to £34.6m (2019: £14.7m), 
reflecting the strong post-lockdown sales order 
growth seen across the business. Additionally, 
the year-end cash position has benefited from 
a £6.1m working capital benefit on PAYE/NI and 
VAT, due to deferment of payments in line with 
the government support offered as part of its 
response to COVID-19.

Following negotiations with landlords, rent 
deferrals totalling £4.3m were achieved. This 
has reduced the payment of capital and interest 
elements of leases, and the majority of this 
benefit will unwind in the new financial year.

Year ended
25 July 2020
£m

Year ended
27 July 2019
£m

59.5
(20.0)
(3.9)
(1.5)

34.1
(4.3)
(5.2)

24.6

24.1
–
(5.6)
(2.5)

16.0
(6.5)
–

9.5

Cash flows also include returns to investors 
made during the first half of the year. The 
Group paid a £4.3m final dividend relating to the 
previous financial year, and also acquired £5.2m 
worth of its own shares. £4.4m of these shares 
were purchased from Parlour Product Holdings 
(LUX) S.A.R.L, and were subsequently cancelled. 
The remaining £0.8m of shares were bought  
into treasury for the purposes of satisfying 
Long-Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) awards.  
More information can be found in note 22.

Dividend
The Board recognises the importance of a return 
on investment to the Group’s shareholders and 
aims to reinstate a progressive dividend policy 
as soon as is appropriate given the general 
uncertainty that the UK currently faces.

Despite the strength of the Group’s balance 
sheet, in light of the current uncertain economic 
environment, coupled with the support 
received from the UK government, it seemed 
inappropriate to use the cash for anything  
other than protecting the financial strength  
and resilience of the business. 

We will continue to assess when it is appropriate 
to re-commence dividend payments. 

Ongoing impact of COVID-19
The Group’s annual result and ongoing trade has 
been significantly impacted by COVID-19, and 
the Group continues to monitor developments. 
It remains difficult to predict with any certainty 
how the situation will evolve in future weeks and 
months. An update on the current situation  
in relation to key stakeholders is set out below.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSStakeholder Engagement

Section 172 Statement
Section 172 of the Companies Act 2006 requires 
a director of a company to act in the way he or 
she considers, in good faith, would most likely 
promote the success of the company for the 
benefit of its members as a whole but having 
regard to a range of factors set out in section 
172(1)(a)-(f) in the Companies Act 2006.

The Board recognises the importance of 
engaging with stakeholders and taking their 
views into account when making decisions, 
although the Board acknowledges that not 
every decision it makes will not necessarily 
result in a positive outcome for all of the Group’s 
stakeholders. Details on how the Board operates 
and the way in which it reaches decisions are set 
out on pages 52 to 56.

This statement sets out how the Directors have 
approached and met their responsibilities under 
s172 Companies Act 2006 in the financial year 
ending 25 July 2020, providing an overview of 
each stakeholders interests, concerns and the 
ways in which the Board has engaged with these 
groups. This report is presented in compliance 
with The Companies (Miscellaneous Reporting) 
Regulations 2018 and the UK Corporate 
Governance Code July 2018.

Examples of interactions with our stakeholders that have taken place in 2020 can be found on page 33.

Non-Financial Information Statement
The table below sets out where stakeholders can find information in our Strategic Report that relates to non-financial matters, as required by the 
Non-financial Reporting requirements as detailed in the Companies Act 2006.

Reporting requirement

Our policies

Where you can find out more

Environmental matters

Employees

32

Social matters

Human rights

Anti-bribery and
anti-corruption

Description of business model

Non-financial KPIs

Principal risks and uncertainties

N/A

N/A

N/A

Regulatory and compliance
Responsible sourcing and supply chain
Sustainability
Monitoring our carbon footprint

Page 44
Page 33
Page 32
Page 75

Diversity and inclusion
Health and safety
Engagement
Code of Business conduct

COVID-19
Apprenticeship programmes
Supporting local communities  
and charities

Page 33 and 76
Page 45
Page 33
Page 76

Page 36
Page 33

Page 33

Responsible sourcing and supply chain
Modern Slavery policy

Page 44
Page 44 and visit our website

Political donations
Whistle-blowing
Anti-bribery and corruption statement

Page 76
Page 42
Page 42

Page 14

Page 26

Page 36

Environment
As a retailer we recognise that 
our operations will impact on 
the environment, and we have 
a duty to ensure that both 
now and in the future we seek 
to minimise this impact. 

During the last twelve months, we have 
completed our Energy Savings Opportunity 
Scheme assessment and identified further 
energy saving opportunities to progress 
our energy and carbon management. This 
develops from our existing position where 
all new sites include LED store lighting and 
energy-efficient heating and cooling systems. 

Since 2013, we have reduced our electrical 
energy consumption by 41.3%; the electrical 
reduction is against a backdrop of opening 12 
all electric stores in that period. Our gas usage 
has reduced 57.1%. 

We are progressively changing our existing 
stores with LED lighting and the reduction of 
gas usage in our stores through replacement 
of gas-fired heating systems which are being 
replaced with high efficiency air-conditioning 
systems (electrically powered). We also 
continue to pursue wider behavioural and 
management improvements to our efficiency 
across all of our operations including our fleet. 

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020 
Who are our 
stakeholders?

Why we focus on  
these stakeholders?

How do we engage  
with them?

What have we done  
during FY20?

People

Building and inspiring an 
outstanding team is at the 
forefront of our business 
strategy. We are committed to 
creating a great place to work 
and to live by our RIGHT values. 

We engage with our people 
through a variety of channels:
 – Discussion Groups
 – Weekly newsletters
 – Conferences
 –
Employee surveys
 – Performance reviews
Employee forums
 –

Our people are our greatest 
asset and key to our success, 
incorporating their views 
into Board decision-making 
is essential to achieving our 
business objectives and creating a 
workplace which treats everyone 
equally. We also monitor gender 
diversity across the business. 
In 2020, our gender balance 
remained unchanged with 33% 
of our workforce being female. 
Further details on our gender pay 
gap are published at scsplc.co.uk.

Suppliers

Vital to our purpose of 
delivering outstanding value, 
quality and choice to our 
customers. We have 16 major 
furniture suppliers based in 
the UK who make and source 
products for us from within the 
UK, Europe and the Far East.

Working closely with our suppliers 
ensures that we have the 
right product offerings for our 
customers. We collaborate with 
some of the most iconic brands in 
furniture which is essential to our 
‘home of brands’ vision. 

We engage with our suppliers 
through regular meetings to 
review product quality and 
performance to ensure  
that we are meeting our 
customers’ needs.

As a responsible business we work 
with our suppliers and with SEDEX 
to ensure that Modern Slavery 
Regulations are adhered to within 
our supply chain.

We collaborate with our suppliers 
to reduce our environmental 
impact by reducing the use of 
single use plastics and looking 
for more sustainable packaging 
options, for example offering 
a carpet made entirely from 
recycled plastics and using 
reusable packaging.

This financial year has been a challenging year for our 
people and engaging with our teams has been more 
important than ever before. A number of examples  
of interaction are set out below:
 – The Board members have been out visiting stores  
and distribution centres, listening to the views of  
our colleagues. 

 – The group’s CEO David Knight and Board member 

George Adams have hosted companywide zoom calls 
to discuss financial performance and to get feedback 
and opinions on matters that affect our colleagues. 
 – Our new ‘Engagement and Internal Communications’ 
team have been collating the results of the annual 
employee survey and putting an implementation plan 
in place to address our people’s concerns. 

 – We have trained and funded various qualifications for 

our people such as CIMA, AAT, 7.5 tonne vehicle drivers 
and apprenticeship programmes. 

 – Through our training offerings we have developed and 

enhanced the skills of our teams.

Throughout the year we worked with our suppliers to 
launch over 100 new products across our furniture and 
flooring ranges.

We brought 5 new suppliers on board to make and 
source our products and we look forward to building our 
relationships with these suppliers and to see mutually 
beneficial volume growth.

Although our operations were paused due to the 
COVID-19 pandemic, we worked with our supplying 
partners to ensure they received payment as normal,  
and were in a strong position to re-start delivery as soon 
as possible. 

33

Customers

We seek to offer our customers 
outstanding value, quality and 
choice for their homes.

Our purpose is built around 
providing an excellent customer 
experience and this focus is 
crucial to the Board’s strategy. 

Our customers are encouraged 
to rate their experience with us 
on Trustpilot and we are thrilled 
to have received over 230,000 
reviews which we regularly review 
and use to reward our staff and 
identify areas for improvement. 

We are very proud to have maintained our ‘Excellent’  
rating on Trustpilot and we are in the process of utilising 
data analysis tools to help us gain further insight from  
our reviews.

During the first week of the lockdown period, our teams 
contacted over 25,000 customers individually to offer 
them reassurance regarding their order.

Communities

During the year, the Group 
and its people continued 
to support many local and 
national great causes,  
close to the hearts and  
minds of the ScS family.

Our store network is spread 
across the UK and they  
play an active role in their  
local communities. 

As a socially responsible business 
it is important to us to contribute 
to society and the economy. 

As part of our daily operations 
our customer facing colleagues 
connect with people and 
customers in their local 
communities every day.  
We continue to support many 
charities chosen by our people.

Through the newly launched appointment system our 
dedicated sales team have enjoyed welcoming customers 
back into our stores and ensuring that they choose the 
right product for them.

We have recruited 557 new colleagues throughout  
the year, creating job opportunities for people across 
various locations. 

We have continued to support local charities with 
donations of £18,000.

Throughout lockdown we donated £48,000 across  
a number of Trussell Trust Foodbanks to support  
our local communities in what was a worrying time  
for many households.

Shareholders

We have two main shareholder 
groups; Institutional investors 
and individual shareholders. 
The majority of our 
shareholders are institutional 
investors. This has been the 
case since our flotation in 2015. 

The Group’s strategy and 
purpose have been built with  
the long-term success of  
the business in mind and for  
the benefit of our members  
as a whole.

We engage with our shareholders 
through a range of channels 
including meetings, the Annual 
Report, our AGM and our financial 
and trading statements. Investors 
are able to keep up-to-date 
through our dedicated  
corporate website.

We have continued to update our shareholders with  
regular trading updates throughout the period as events 
have unfolded.

We held a live analyst meeting open to all shareholders,  
and a webcast of the meeting is published to our website 
for those unable to attend. 

Our CFO is on hand to speak to our shareholders and 
address any queries they have.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSRisk and Risk Management

Our risk management framework is designed to manage  
and report on risks that could affect the performance and 
reputation of our business

Our approach to risk management
The Group’s strategy takes into account risks 
along with opportunities and manages them 
accordingly. The Group accepts that it faces 
risks and uncertainties that could affect the 
achievement of its strategic objectives and 
consequently mitigating controls are in place  
to reduce the risk to an acceptable level.  
Regular reviews of existing and emerging risks 
are undertaken along with the control systems 
and processes to mitigate them. 

Identification of risks
The Board and the Group’s senior management 
team have a clearly defined responsibility for 
identifying the major business risks facing the 
Group and for developing systems to report, 
mitigate and manage those risks. This process 
has been reviewed this year by engaging third-
party risk experts who facilitated risk workshops 
with senior management to review and provide 
assurance over the existing principal and 
emerging risks.

Risk management framework
The Board has overall responsibility for 
managing risk. The Audit Committee has 
oversight of risk management and reports to the 
Board. The established governance framework 
underpinning our approach to risk management 
is set out in detail below and includes monthly 
reporting of risks to the Operating Board, and 
consideration of risk management at every Audit 
Committee, including the robust assessment of 
the existing principal and emerging risks and the 
related control environment. 

34

Risk appetite
The focus on effective risk management 
remains high on the Board’s agenda and this 
approach cascades all the way through the 
organisation. The culture of the organisation 
ensures that all activities, from day-to-day 
operations to high-level strategic decisions, 
are performed in line with this approach. 
Management’s assessment of our principal  
risks is based on the potential impact, and  
the likelihood of the risk materialising, and  
any change in the risk from the prior year.  
The governance of risk is undertaken in the 
context of the Group’s overall risk appetite. 

Risk management processes and framework

05.

This process is then reviewed, 
monitored and reported to the 
Board and Audit Committee  
on an ongoing basis

01.

Key risks by area (and  
any changes since the  
last review)

04.

Progress in executing 
agreed process 
improvement and 
implementing agreed  
risk mitigation

Risk  
management 
process

02.

Risk ratings – by 
evaluating each risk and 
assigning a score

03.

Identifying the 
required actions 
against each risk

On an annual basis, a calibration model of 
scoring one to five is used to define the level  
of risk appetite for each type of risk. The Group 
has a minimal risk appetite for areas of statutory 
compliance but is willing to accept greater risk 
to achieve its objectives and drive the business 
forward. The Board’s appetite for each of the 
principal risks is set out in the table below, and 
within the principal risks on the following pages.

Monitoring of risks
There is an ongoing process for identifying, 
evaluating, managing and reporting on the 
significant risks faced by the Group. This has 
been in place for the year under review and up to 
the date of approval of this Annual Report. The 
Board has also performed a robust assessment 
of the principal risks and mitigating controls.

Process for preparing consolidated 
financial statements 
The Group has established internal controls  
and risk management systems in relation  
to the process for preparing consolidated 
financial statements.

The key features of this are:
 – Management regularly monitors and 
considers developments in reporting 
regulation and, where appropriate, reflects 
developments in the consolidated financial 
statements. The external auditors and 
the Audit Committee also keep the Board 
appraised of these developments;
 – The consolidated financial statements 

are reviewed by the Audit Committee and 
the Board. This review takes into account 
reports from management and the external 
auditors on significant judgements, changes 
in accounting policies, changes in accounting 
estimates and other relevant matters to the 
consolidated financial statements; and
 – The full-year financial statements are 

subject to external audit and the half-year 
financial statements are reviewed by the 
external auditors.

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020The key roles and delegated responsibilities:

Board
Overall responsibility for the leadership of risk management, sets strategic objectives, risk appetite and 
monitors performance.

Executive Directors
Responsible for disseminating 
risk policies. They support 
and help the Operating Board 
assess risk. The Executive 
Directors also oversee risk 
management throughout the 
Group and encourage open 
communication on risk matters. 
The Executive Directors assess 
the materiality of risks in the 
context of the whole Group.

The Audit Committee
The Audit Committee 
oversees risk management 
and internal controls. The 
Committee reviews the 
Group’s internal controls, 
sets objectives and monitors 
the effectiveness of the 
Internal Audit team. The 
Committee also monitors the 
independence and expertise  
of the external auditors.

Audit, Risk and Compliance 
Responsible for the 
monitoring of the Group’s risk 
management approach and 
provides a link between the 
operational managers and the 
Audit Committee. The Head 
of Audit, Risk & Compliance 
reports formally to the Audit 
Committee and has direct 
access to the Chair of the Audit 
Committee. The Audit, Risk 
and Compliance team takes a 
risk-based approach to planning 
audit work.

Operating Board
Responsible for the identification and assessment of existing and emerging risks at an operational level.  
The Operating Board are responsible for the implementation of agreed mitigating controls.

35

Risk appetite levels 2020
Low

Low to medium

Balanced

Material

Aggressive

Top-down
Governance and oversight 
identification, assessment  
and mitigation of existing  
and emerging risk at  
corporate level.

Bottom-up
Risk management reporting.

Principal risk

Strategic risks

Economic environment

Competition

Key trading periods 

Regulation and compliance

Infrastructure risks

Business systems and infrastructure

Supply chain, infrastructure and product

Our people and culture

Reputational risks

Brand and reputation

Financial risk

Credit risk, liquidity and consumer credit

The table shows that the majority of appetite for risk is low or low to medium, with only economic environment, competition, and key trading periods 
showing a balanced appetite. During the year the Board’s appetite has only changed in one area and this is a reduction in appetite for risk in business 
systems and infrastructure.

Risk Appetite

Definition

Low

Control over processes is the most significant concern. Commercial considerations are secondary and should not influence 
decision making in this area.

Low to medium

Control over processes should be a strong concern. However, commercial impact should still be considered if significant.

Balanced

Material

Aggressive

Controls and commercial impacts should be given equal weight in this area.

Control over processes should be as strong as possible, however if commercial impacts are too great then controls should  
be sacrificed.

Commercial consideration is the primary concern. No controls should be implemented that impact on commercial aspects  
in this area.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSPrincipal Risks and Uncertainties 

Good risk management is essential to underpin the achievement 
of our strategic objectives. We continue to carry out robust 
reviews of all risks and respond quickly and effectively 

The Board’s assessment of the principal risks and uncertainties facing the Group and the mitigation in place are set out below.

We have a number of processes and controls in place to mitigate these risks and they are reviewed regularly. The Audit Committee and the Board formally 
review the principal risks and uncertainties three times a year (including the consideration of the viability statement). The Board also monitors key 
performance indicators through Board reports and has regular presentations on a number of the key risk areas.

On a monthly basis, principal risks and mitigating controls are reported to the Operating Board (including the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer).

We consider the risks surrounding COVID-19 and Brexit to be significant and impact a number of our principal risks, and have outlined these separately below.

In this continually changing and challenging 
environment we continue to monitor this risk 
and associated impacts to ensure we adhere 
to best practice and government advice. The 
business has responded well, quickly adapting 
to new ways of working, whist minimising the 
impact and risk to employees, customers, 
suppliers and the resilience of the Group. It is 
difficult to predict with any certainty what the 
impact of COVID-19 will have over any given 
period, however, it is certain that the impact 
will be enterprise wide and will have a profound 
effect on priorities and other existing risks facing 
the Group. The impact of, and the increased  
risk created by the pandemic, is highlighted 
within each of the principal risks set out in the 
following pages. 

36

COVID-19
COVID-19 has had a wide ranging and significant 
impact on a number of the principal risks and 
uncertainties within our business. We have 
implemented new controls, risk assessments 
and procedures to ensure that we follow 
government advice and industry best practice. 
The mitigating controls implemented cover a 
wide range of responses which are set out below:
 – Immediately prior to and post the initial 
period of lockdown, Operating Board 
meetings were held on a daily basis to  
ensure relevant actions and decisions 
could be made quickly, and that these were 
effectively communicated to all teams 
across the business; 

 – The cash flow and profit impacts of different 
levels/lengths of lockdown were modelled 
prior to the temporary closure of our stores 
and distribution centres in late March; 
 – In March 2020, we drew down our £12m 
revolving credit facility (RCF) to further 
secure our cash position. Covenants which 
allowed for greater headroom were then 
agreed with the bank. The RCF was repaid 
prior to the year end, reflecting the strength 
of the Group’s balance sheet;

 – The closure of our stores and distribution 

centres was completed efficiently in line with 
government timelines;

 – The majority of operational colleagues were 
furloughed and the Group made monthly 
claims under the Coronavirus Job Retention 
Scheme (CJRS), allowing us to retain all our 
staff throughout the lockdown;

 – Home working was implemented quickly and 
effectively for all staff who were required 
to continue to work, including the provision 
of equipment and assessments of home 
working environments;

 – A senior management team and Operating 

Board meeting was set up weekly to 
communicate key messages and discuss 
emerging issues and agreed actions;
 – Communication channels were set up  
with all external stakeholders including  
close support for our customers and key 
suppliers, along with dialogue with relevant 
regulatory authorities; 

 – A staff forum was created to allow two-way 
communication of the latest developments, 
make suggestions and to raise concerns, 

including shared views related to the  
re-opening processes;

 – Our communications team produced  

a detailed regular business bulletin that  
was sent to all colleagues, including those  
on furlough, to ensure everyone was kept  
up to date with the latest information; 
 – All non-essential costs were reduced  
and planned capital expenditure was 
deferred along with the suspension  
of the interim dividend;

 – Landlords were engaged to manage rent 
obligations and negotiate rent deferrals  
and rent-free periods; 

 – Following the announcement that stores 
could re-open and as a result of the 
detailed planning work carried out during 
lockdown, we were able to re-deploy staff 
and quickly re-open stores with all the 
correct procedures and personal protective 
equipment in place;

 – Operating processes were updated to 

ensure that all best practice guidelines are 
followed, making ‘safety first’ our priority  
in all areas of the business;

 – We provided additional resource, both 

through new recruitment and from within our 
existing team to support additional demand 
experienced by our online sales channel;
 – Detailed cash modelling was carried out  

to assess various scenarios and ensure that 
cash was preserved to allow us to continue 
to operate. Although we could not predict 
the ongoing impact on the business, we 
considered severe and plausible downsides;
 – The RCF has now been repaid and cancelled 
and we have secured a new three-year £20m 
facility under the Coronavirus Large Business 
Interruption Loan Scheme (CLBILS);

 – Risk assessments were performed for our 
key operational areas and detailed working 
practices and training was provided to 
ensure the safety of our teams; and

 – We provided additional resource in our stores 
to help our customers understand our safety 
procedures and all of our people across 
the business were provided with personal 
protective equipment.

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020Brexit
Brexit remains a significant economic event facing the UK for the coming year. This risk continues to increase due to the elevated uncertainty over the 
UK’s withdrawal from the EU in December 2020, and the disruption to trade negotiations caused by the COVID-19 pandemic. The potential impact of the 
risks facing the Group following withdrawal remain uncertain. In particular, we consider the highest risks being related to the UK economy and subsequent 
consumer confidence, the risk of supply chain disruption and cost increases, and labour availability, both within our operations and within our supply chain. 
We also recognise that there could be an impact on the regulatory guidelines that the Group operates within, although we expect those to be minimal  
in the short to medium term. 

Actions taken include:
 – Operating Board monitoring and review of the evolving impact of the post-transition trading relationship between the UK and the EU;
 – The Operating Board has considered various scenarios depending on the outcome of trade negotiations and have prepared plans for each scenario;
 – Working with our suppliers to ensure that they have made appropriate plans;
 – Ongoing monitoring of regulatory changes that may affect our operations post-transition period;
 – Reviews of impacts on staffing levels to ensure that staff retention is managed appropriately; and
 – Review of pricing strategy and changes in our cost base to ensure we can continue to offer the best value product in the market.
The impact of, and the increased risk created by Brexit, is highlighted within each of the principal risks set out in the following pages.

37

Risk categories
Each principal risk is grouped into an overarching risk category to enable better analysis of risk and improved risk reporting.

Strategic risks are those which affect the marketplace and environment in which our business operates. Principal risks in this category are:  
‘Economic environment’, ‘Competition’, ‘Key trading periods’ and ‘Regulation and compliance’.

Infrastructure risks are those which affect the people and the resources that are required to operate our business. Principal risks in this category are: 
‘Business systems and infrastructure’, ‘Supply chain infrastructure and product’ and ‘Our people and culture’.

Reputational risks are those which could damage the brand or perception of our business. The principal risk in this category is ‘Brand and reputation’. 

Financial risks affect the ability to ensure sufficient funds are available to run our business. We also rely on the availability of consumer credit  
to customers to enable us to fulfil strategic plans. Principal risks in this category are: ‘Credit risk, liquidity and consumer credit’. 

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSPrincipal Risks and Uncertainties continued

Key to change in risk level since the previous year:  

  Risk higher (worsened)

  Risk stayed level

  Risk lower (improved) 

Strategic risks

Risk

Risk description

Mitigation

Progress in 2020

Consumer confidence 
Changes in consumer confidence, 
driven by political or economic 
concerns, including increased 
uncertainty in job security, have a 
direct impact on consumer spending 
on discretionary high value items, such 
as furniture and flooring, which could 
result in a decline in the performance 
of the Group.

The ongoing economic uncertainty 
the UK is currently facing, given the 
ongoing exit from the EU and the 
impact of COVID-19, means consumer 
confidence continues to be subdued.

Maintaining a business with the right 
level of resilience to protect the Group 
throughout the economic cycle. 
This includes having an appropriately 
structured balance sheet with sensible 
levels of cash and no debt.

Operating a lean business model with 
a high proportion of costs that are 
flexible with demand allows us to adapt 
and right size the cost base quickly, 
whilst remaining competitive in  
our markets.

Maintaining our established diverse 
product offering, including a market-
leading upholstered furniture and 
flooring range with complementary 
dining and occasional furniture.  
Our range of products at broad price 
points across all categories allows  
our customers to find good value 
product for all budgets, along with 
excellent service and a range of 
interest-free options.

Closing cash on the balance sheet 
increased from £57.7m at the end  
of July 2019 to £82.3m at the end  
of July 2020.

Our cost base and structure is 
constantly under review and we 
continue to ensure that we maintain 
our efficient business model.  
Flexible costs in 2020 totalled 72%.

Our pricing strategy has always  
been based on offering the best value,  
along with a wide range of price points 
and this continues to be our focus.

Our updated store layout and range 
planning is now complete and is 
embedded across the Group.

Our focus on providing value to our 
core demographic and our significant 
investment in marketing continues  
and ensures that our core customer 
knows who we are and what we offer.

Improvements in our customer journey 
mean customers can have confidence 
when shopping with the Group.

Economic 
environment

Change in risk level

Link to strategic priorities 
3  Optimising product
4  Sales density
6  Flooring growth
7  Improve profitability 

Performance indicator 
Sales performance

Risk appetite 
Balanced

38

Risk profile after mitigating 
controls
Medium

Responsibility
Board

Reports to 
Chief Executive Officer

Currency rates
Exchange rate fluctuations could lead 
to cost pressure.

We purchase all our products on a 
sterling basis, minimising exposure 
to exchange rate movements. We 
have always worked closely with 
our suppliers on exchange rate 
fluctuations to minimise any impact  
on our cost base and our retail  
pricing strategy. 

Throughout 2020, the Group has 
continued to manage cost increases 
with our supplier base. This has led to 
the Group’s margin being at a similar 
level to prior years. 

Interest rates
The Group offers interest-free credit 
options on all products we sell,  
the provision of which results  
in a cost to the Group from our  
finance house partners.

Interest rate fluctuations could lead 
to cost pressure and also reduce 
customer’s disposable income levels.

Cost of and access to consumer 
finance is managed by having strong 
relationships with three finance houses 
who currently operate with the Group. 
Relationships are also maintained with 
other finance houses to ensure the 
Group continues to receive the right 
service at the right cost.

Over the year, interest-free credit 
charges have remained stable. 
Since the end of the year LIBOR, has 
reduced, which would normally result 
in a reduction in charges to the Group. 
However, customer default levels are 
forecast to increase, and, therefore, 
changes to charges are forecast  
to be minimal.

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020Key to change in risk level since the previous year:  

  Risk higher (worsened)

  Risk stayed level

  Risk lower (improved) 

Risk

Risk description

Mitigation

Progress in 2020

Economic 
environment 
continued

COVID-19 impact
The pandemic, coupled with the 
government’s response, has led to 
a material impact on the Group’s 
activities in the financial year. There  
is an ongoing risk of further disruption 
to the Group’s performance if further 
restrictions are imposed. 

The full extent of the impact 
on employment and consumer 
confidence is not yet understood.  
Both are likely to reduce in the short  
to medium term, leading to a reduction 
in demand and spending on high value 
discretionary items.

The longer-term impact on exchange 
and interest rates is not yet known but 
this could lead to increased operating 
costs to the Group.

Our cautious approach and focus 
on building a resilient balance sheet 
position in the past few years has 
allowed the Group to continue to 
satisfy customer orders, whilst treating 
our teams and supply partners fairly 
during the last few turbulent months. 

The Group cash flow and financial 
forecasting is robust and allows the 
business to model and minimise 
potential impacts.

Following the outbreak of COVID-19,  
a number of measures were put 
in place to mitigate the risk to our 
business including:
 –

Increased financial modelling  
to plan cash flow impact  
including increased downside 
scenario modelling; 

 – Utilisation and amendment of  

 –

bank revolving credit facility (RCF) 
to maximise cash availability;
Existing RCF replaced with a larger, 
longer tenure £20m CLBILS facility 
which is in place until August 2023;

 –

 – Use of government schemes for 
a retail rates holiday, and to defer 
VAT payment until March 2021;
 – Cash management exercises with 
most capital expenditure projects 
put on hold, and rent deferral 
agreements from landlords;
Implementation of the Coronavirus 
Job Retention Scheme (CJRS) for 
over 1,400 staff;
Investment in personal protective 
equipment (PPE) for use by staff 
in order to increase consumer 
confidence; and
Improved communication 
channels set up with colleagues, 
customers and suppliers.

 –

 –

39

Brexit
The Group may be unable to  
identify and effectively respond  
to the challenges of a post-Brexit 
business environment leading to 
reduced performance.

The risks following Brexit include 
an increase in supplier costs and 
disruption to the supply chain. 

Our review of the potential impact  
of the Brexit outcome and mitigating 
actions that the Group can employ has 
been completed. Working closely with 
our suppliers has enabled us to plan for 
the Brexit process and to minimise any 
impact on our cost base and our retail 
pricing strategy.

Our review highlighted that the 
exposure of the Group is partly 
reduced through our UK-based 
suppliers and that the level of finished 
goods that come from the EU are 
proportionately low. 

The nature of our product also means 
that small delays in transportation will 
not have a material impact on our lead 
times or proposition offered.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSPrincipal Risks and Uncertainties continued

Key to change in risk level since the previous year:  

  Risk higher (worsened)

  Risk stayed level

  Risk lower (improved) 

Strategic risks continued

Risk

Risk description

Mitigation

Progress in 2020

Competition

Change in risk level

Competitive marketplace
Intensifying competition, particularly 
online, and operating within 
fragmented markets could increase 
pressure on sales and margins.

Link to strategic priorities 
4  Sales density
5  Market-leading website
6  Flooring growth
7  Improve profitability 

Performance indicator 
Sales performance

Risk appetite 
Balanced

Risk profile after mitigating 
controls
Medium

Responsibility
Commercial Director

Reports to
Chief Executive Officer

40

Changes in marketplace
Failing to respond to key changes in the 
competitive environment is a risk to 
the Group’s strategic plans for growth 
and profitability.

We continue to diversify and develop 
our product range and continually 
respond to changing patterns in 
demand, whilst remaining focused  
on our core market. 

Our upholstered furniture range 
includes third-party brands and ScS 
house brands. Due to our scale and 
importance to our suppliers, our 
ranges are exclusive to the Group.

We differentiate ourselves from the 
competition by ensuring the customer 
journey creates a compelling reason 
to purchase. Our retail teams are 
continually focused on the customer 
experience, which is core to our 
success. We diligently review and act 
upon feedback from our customers 
through platforms such as Trustpilot 
and Google My Business reviews.

We regularly monitor competitor’s 
activities to ensure we maintain  
a highly competitive position in  
the market place. 

We monitor product performance 
across the network and in competitors 
to identify emerging trends.

We constantly invest in our website 
to increase user experience to allow 
customers to purchase online or to 
carry out research before visiting  
a store. We also operate a telesales 
operation, providing a full  
omnichannel offering.

Our marketing strategies are 
constantly reviewed to ensure  
that we are reaching our target 
audience effectively.

During 2020, we continued with our 
review and revamp of our ranges and 
store layouts to ensure we maximise 
the customer proposition and 
journey. A new concession feel ‘Home 
of Brands’ concept was rolled out 
across the store network in the year, 
introducing new house brands to  
the range.

In light of market opportunity and 
demand, the Group increased the 
value offering presented in store.

Our commitment to achieve having 
the best customer service in our 
market remains an area of focus.  
The Group’s TrustScore increased  
for the fourth year in a row.

Our market share in upholstered 
furniture continues to increase  
from 9.4% in 2019 to 9.8% in 2020.

The introduction of enhanced data 
analytics during the year has increased 
the insight and speed of reviewing 
product performance.

During the year, new campaign 
management software was 
implemented into our telesales 
operation, increasing efficiency and 
the customer experience.

At the end of the year, a new faster and 
more intuitive website was launched. 
This site, which is mobile optimised, 
increases the user experience and 
allows the Group to improve how  
we showcase our products.

Continued progress has been made 
with digital marketing and our Search 
Engine Optimisation (SEO) rankings, 
seeing more website traffic and online 
sales increasing by 13.6%.

Our review of marketing strategies 
has been under continuous review 
throughout 2020, ensuring our 
investment into relevant advertising 
channels maximises our opportunity  
to reach our customers. The 
temporary closure of our stores  
in late March allowed the Group  
to trial a different mix of traditional  
and digital media allocation.

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020 
Key to change in risk level since the previous year:  

  Risk higher (worsened)

  Risk stayed level

  Risk lower (improved) 

Risk

Risk description

Mitigation

Progress in 2020

Competition 
continued

COVID-19 impact
The COVID-19 pandemic,  
whilst challenging will also present 
opportunities for the Group. The 
period of closure and post-lockdown 
trading has and will cause financial 
distress to competitors such that they 
may consider their level of participation 
in the market.

Some competitors have ceased 
trading and others have been forced  
to scale back operations.

The pandemic has also increased the 
number of consumers who are willing 
to buy bigger ticket items online. This 
presents both a risk and an opportunity 
for the business.

The Group will continue to monitor 
consumer habits closely and is well 
placed to react to any changes, such 
as the shift to online, and to also take 
advantage of a greater market share in 
the event of other businesses leaving 
the market.

At the end of the year, post the initial 
COVID-19 lockdown period, two of the 
Group’s largest competitors went into 
administration. Whilst, one did re-open 
post-administration, it now operates 
with a smaller footprint than it  
did previously.

The Group is committed to continue 
to increase expenditure on the digital 
shopping experience where returns 
justify the investment.

We continue to monitor risks and 
explore opportunities that the 
pandemic has presented, and ensure 
that any response to a change in risk or 
opportunity is addressed accordingly.

As noted above, the online customer 
proposition has been enhanced by the 
launch of a new website. This has been 
complemented by introducing a range 
of online-only products.

Brexit 
The risk of supply chain disruption could 
reduce the availability of products and 
therefore our ability to compete.

We continue to work with our suppliers 
to ensure we have a supply of products 
to continue our competitive offering.

During the year we have continued  
to monitor the political landscape  
and our supplier arrangements.

41

Risk

Risk description

Mitigation

Progress in 2020

Key trading 
periods 

Change in risk level 

Link to strategic priorities 
4  Sales density
5  Market-leading website
7  Improve profitability 

Performance indicator 
Sales performance

Risk appetite 
Balanced

Risk profile after mitigating 
controls
Medium

Responsibility
Chief Executive Officer

Key trading periods
Furniture retailing has historically 
relied on certain key trading days 
and periods, including bank holidays. 
Prolonged extreme cold, warm or 
unseasonal weather conditions over 
these key trading periods may reduce 
footfall in our stores, resulting in weak 
sales and potentially adverse effects 
on profitability.

Close monitoring and our ability to flex 
the marketing due to the strength of 
our relationships with key advertisers 
enables us to react quickly to changes 
in the marketplace, including extreme 
weather events.

We actively monitor and forecast 
demand and, should this risk occur, 
we would review planned and tactical 
promotional activity to determine 
whether strengthening this would 
drive sales.

Our website enables customers  
to purchase easily without needing  
to visit a store. 

The year saw the Group react quickly to 
threats during or around the historical 
key trading periods. Advertising was 
flexed appropriately, reducing spend 
and risk.

Our marketing strategy is under 
constant review and we have 
undertaken significant work on 
improving our presence on digital 
channels. We continue to monitor  
our investments to achieve maximum 
impact with our core customers.

Our recently launched and updated 
website will improve the customer 
journey and experience to ensure that 
we can continue to trade successfully 
throughout any impact of adverse 
periods of weather or closures due  
to a pandemic. 

COVID-19 impact
The closure of shops in late March to 
late May due to COVID-19 impacted 
on the key trading period of Easter 
and the first May bank holiday. Future 
disruption is possible if a second wave 
of the pandemic results in further 
closures at a regional or national level 
on or around a key trading period.

The strength of our relationships with 
key advertisers and our flexible cost 
base enables the business to conserve 
cash when an extreme event occurs.

In response to the temporary 
closure of our stores in late March, all 
advertising was cancelled or deferred. 
The strength of our relationships 
with key advertisers meant we were 
able to re-allocate this spend with no 
penalties, and to turn this promotional 
activity back on following the  
re-opening of the stores in May.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
Principal Risks and Uncertainties continued

Key to change in risk level since the previous year:  

  Risk higher (worsened)

  Risk stayed level

  Risk lower (improved) 

Strategic risks continued

Risk

Risk description

Mitigation

Progress in 2020

Key regulated activities
The Group’s operations are subject  
to a number of regulations, including:
 – Trading standards
 – Advertising standards
 – Product safety and quality 
 – Health & safety
 –
Environment
 – Data protection (GDPR)
 – Bribery Act
 –
 – Modern Slavery

Financial Conduct Authority (FCA)

Non-compliance with any of the 
regulations could result in a financial 
cost, and/or reputational damage. 

Regulation and 
compliance 

Change in risk level

Link to strategic priorities 
1  Outstanding team
2  Customer experience
4  Sales density
7  Improve profitability 

Performance indicator 
Prosecution and  
regulatory action

Risk appetite 
Low

42

Risk profile after mitigating 
controls
Medium

Responsibility
Corporate Services 
Director

Reports to
Chief Executive Officer

Enhancements have been made to 
our training programme (including 
online training) to improve monitoring 
and reporting processes, covering 
all regulated areas and in particular 
the requirements of the FCA. We 
have introduced a ‘Staple Six’ that all 
colleagues must complete annually.

A new online training course to help 
our retail colleagues introduce finance 
to customers has been implemented. 
This will accommodate increased levels 
of monitoring, compliance, reporting 
and support to colleagues.

Monitoring of our compliance with 
GDPR continues to be an area of focus 
and we have continued to enhance our 
processes and systems to respond 
quickly to any subject access requests. 

Risk assessments were carried out 
across the whole network prior to 
re-opening following the COVID-19 
enforced temporary closures.

A new COVID-19 and use of PPE online 
training module was also introduced  
to support all colleagues across  
the business.

All team members are provided  
with relevant training dependant  
on their role. Completion of training  
is monitored and reported monthly  
to the Operating Board. 

Any complaints regarding regulated 
activity are reported to and 
investigated by the Audit, Risk and 
Compliance team and reported  
to the Operating Board and the  
Audit Committee.

We actively monitor compliance 
with our existing obligations and we 
regularly update and re-issue internal 
policies and procedures. 

We review current guidelines on pricing 
and promotions through regular review 
and monitoring.

All employees are issued with a code of 
conduct, which is updated annually and 
published on our intranet. We have an 
anti-bribery and corruption policy and 
all employees dealing with third parties 
are expected to undergo training. Our 
anti-bribery and corruption policy sets 
out our approach for the giving and 
accepting of gifts and hospitality.  
A regular review of gifts and hospitality 
registers and the policy is carried out by 
the Audit, Risk and Compliance team.

We have a long established confidential 
whistle-blower hotline, which allows 
colleagues to raise any concerns. Our 
policy is intended to make employees 
or third parties aware that they 
should report any serious concerns 
or suspicions about any wrongdoing 
or malpractice on the part of any 
employee of the Group.

We carry out due diligence product 
testing regularly to ensure our products 
comply with all relevant regulations.

Warranty regulation
Expected changes to the regulation 
and reporting of product warranties 
could affect future sales and profit 
from this income stream. Further 
legislation changes may have a 
retrospective impact, effecting  
future profit levels.

We actively monitor and respond 
to the updates provided by the FCA 
ensuring any relevant requirements are 
understood and appropriate action can 
be planned, in particular in relation to 
warranty sales.

The business has continued to monitor 
developments in potential warranty 
regulation and has been working 
on changes to ensure the Group 
continues to comply with any  
required changes.

Our pricing model allows us to adjust 
what we charge for our products,  
and we will consider implementing 
these if changes to regulation or 
reporting impact the current level  
of warranty income.

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020Key to change in risk level since the previous year:  

  Risk higher (worsened)

  Risk stayed level

  Risk lower (improved) 

Infrastructure risks

Risk

Risk description

Mitigation

Progress in 2020

During the past year our investment  
in IT has continued, in particular  
where this related to cyber  
security improvements. 

We have load tested our disaster 
recovery site throughout the year, 
including relocating half of our head 
office support functions to operate 
from the site in March. 

We have enabled a number of staff  
to work from home, reducing the  
risks within our head office.

43

System availability
The Group’s performance is heavily 
reliant on the continuous operation of 
our IT systems. Outages or disruption 
could result in a decrease in sales 
performance and impact our  
delivery service.

Information security
There is a risk that a loss of data  
could have a significant adverse 
reputational impact.

Cyber security and 
performance
Any major disruption (such as a 
cyber-attack), sustained performance 
problems, or failure to keep technology 
up-to-date could constitute  
a significant risk to our business.

Business 
systems and 
infrastructure

Change in risk level

Link to strategic priorities 
2  Customer experience
5  Market-leading website
7  Improved profitability 

Performance indicator 
Number of major incidents
System performance

Risk appetite 
Low 

Risk profile after mitigating 
controls
Medium

Responsibility
Chief Financial Officer

Reports to
Chief Executive Officer

A 24-hour system for monitoring 
performance is in place for business 
critical systems. A 24-hour third-party 
support contract is also in place for all 
critical systems.

A business continuity plan is in place 
together with a disaster recovery 
plan and alternative operating site. 
Arrangements are reviewed annually 
and updates made accordingly. 

We have processes and systems 
in place to ensure system access is 
appropriately controlled and access  
to sensitive data is limited. 

The Group is committed to ensuring 
that its network, applications and data 
are protected and all relevant software 
and hardware updates are installed  
on a regular basis.

We use third-party experts to 
regularly test our resilience against 
cyber-attack. This testing covers 
both external and internal penetration 
testing, including granting access 
to hardware that sits within our 
physical network to understand what 
weaknesses the latest cyber security 
tools can identify.

All access to networks and systems 
remotely are restricted to those 
people using Virtual Private Network 
(VPN) tools.

Staff are provided with Company 
IT equipment and the use of other 
equipment is prohibited. All staff have 
been issued with information security 
guidance, which is updated annually. 

COVID-19 impact
Following guidelines introduced by 
the government regarding increased 
home working, there is an increased 
risk that the Group’s business systems 
could be impacted by the number  
of staff working remotely.

Prior to moving to full remote working, 
the Group initially implemented the 
business continuity plans to reduce 
the risk to employees located in our 
head office. This involved splitting our 
support teams across our head office 
and disaster recovery site along  
with increased home working.

To reduce the risk to our colleagues, 
the business enabled all of our office-
based staff to work from home.  
This demonstrated that the Group 
has the ability to operate key support 
functions remotely.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
Principal Risks and Uncertainties continued

Key to change in risk level since the previous year:  

  Risk higher (worsened)

  Risk stayed level

  Risk lower (improved) 

Infrastructure risks continued

Risk

Risk description

Mitigation

Progress in 2020

Supply chain, 
infra-structure 
and product

Change in risk level

Link to strategic priorities 
3  Product strategy
4  Sales density
6  Flooring growth
7  Improved profitability 

Performance indicator 
Sales performance
Customer feedback
Delivery optimisation 

Supplier resilience  
and capacity
The majority of the products we sell 
are sourced from a small number of key 
suppliers based in the UK. If a supplier  
is unable to meet demand or ceases  
to trade this would disrupt supply  
to customers.

Ethical practices
Given that parts of our supply chain 
are based in the Far East there is an 
increased risk of ensuring compliance 
over ethical practices. 

Product quality  
and safety
If we are unable to provide a good 
quality and safe product there 
is a risk to the reputation of the 
Group, resulting in loss of customer 
confidence and reduction in demand.

We have ensured that at least two 
factories can produce a comparable 
model for each product we sell, 
reducing the risk of disruption  
in the event of a supplier issue.

Supplier performance has improved 
in the year, based on product quality, 
independent safety testing and, 
up until the impact of the lockdown 
period, on-time delivery metrics.

We have continued as a member of 
Sedex and promote the membership 
with our suppliers to monitor risks of 
modern slavery within our supply chain. 
We are reviewing other opportunities 
to enhance our oversight of ethical 
trading within the supply chain. 

We have maintained our accreditation 
from the Furniture Industry Research 
Associated Certified Compliance 
scheme, and are proud that ScS was 
the first UK company to achieve this.

On time delivery and product quality  
is monitored and reported to the  
Board on a regular basis.

Our review of supplier financial stability 
ensures that any early signs of failure 
are addressed if necessary.

All suppliers are required to be 
members of Sedex and we expect 
all our suppliers to comply with the 
relevant legislation and best practices. 

We have a programme of regular 
independent testing on our products 
to ensure ongoing compliance to 
current regulations.

Our customer service team hold 
regular meetings with suppliers to 
review quality and agree appropriate 
action for continuous improvement.

COVID-19 impact
During, and subsequent to, the 
pandemic crisis there is a risk of 
disruption to the Group’s supply chain. 
This could result in delayed orders or an 
increase in costs due to manufacturing 
cost increases.

In response to COVID-19 we have 
worked closely with our suppliers to 
monitor their response and ability to 
deal with the impact of the pandemic.

The Group has paid suppliers in 
line with existing terms during the 
lockdown period to ensure they are 
able to re-commence production  
to fulfil our outstanding customer 
order book.

Any product delays have been 
communicated to customers as  
soon as we have been made aware.

We continue to monitor the impact 
of COVID-19 on our supply chain and 
work with our suppliers to minimise 
any disruption. This includes increased 
levels of forecasting and capacity 
planning following the post-lockdown 
increase in demand.

Brexit
There is a risk of disruption to the 
supply chain along with a potential 
increase in duties leading to an increase 
in cost base.

We continue to monitor the evolving 
impact of post-transition trading 
relationship with the EU. 

We continue to review arrangements  
in place covering our suppliers and  
we continue to monitor and work  
with them to reduce our exposure. 

44

Risk appetite 
Low to medium

Risk profile after mitigating 
controls
Medium

Responsibility
Logistics Director
Commercial Director

Reports to
Chief Executive Officer

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020 
Key to change in risk level since the previous year:  

  Risk higher (worsened)

  Risk stayed level

  Risk lower (improved) 

Risk

Risk description

Mitigation

Progress in 2020

Our people and 
culture

Change in risk level

Link to strategic priorities 
1  Outstanding team
2  Customer experience
7  Improved profitability 

Performance indicator 
Colleague retention

Risk appetite 
Low to medium

Risk profile after mitigating 
controls
Medium

Responsibility
Corporate Services 
Director

Reports to
Chief Executive Officer

Team retention
Our colleagues are critical to enable 
the delivery of a high standard of 
customer service. We rely on the 
quality, experience and engagement 
of all our colleagues across the whole 
business. Poor retention will increase 
the risk of loss of knowledge,  
increase the cost of recruitment  
and retraining, and impact on the 
customer experience.

Payroll costs
Any future increase to the minimum 
living wage will affect the Group’s cost 
base and our ability to retain staff.

COVID-19 impact
The impact of COVID-19 and  
the resulting government action 
resulted in staff being furloughed  
for a significant period of time.  
Staff returning to work could feel 
anxious, which may impact efficiency 
and absenteeism. 

There is a risk that a number of staff 
from one location being diagnosed 
with the virus, resulting in a temporary 
closure of a store or distribution centre 
which would impact our performance 
and our ability to deliver the best 
customer experience.

Forming part of our wider priority 
‘Building and inspiring an outstanding 
team’ we are constantly reviewing our 
terms and conditions of employment 
to ensure they remain competitive and 
fair within the sector. 

Our succession planning has been 
in place for a number of years and 
includes strategic and contingency 
measures in the event that key 
individuals are not available. The plan 
is refreshed and reviewed on an annual 
basis by the Board.

We constantly review retention rates 
and further insight is gained through  
an exit interview process.

Appropriate rewards and incentives 
are in place to secure the retention 
of our senior management team. 
The incentives focus on rewarding 
performance as well as recognising  
the need to retain the experience  
of our senior managers.

The Group is accredited with Investors 
in People status and forms part of 
a wider strategy for ‘Building and 
inspiring an outstanding team’.

Our flat management structure 
allows the business to react quickly 
to minimise costs and maximise our 
people focus during a lockdown period.

In response to COVID-19 and following 
the re-opening of business, the Group 
invested in the re-training of staff  
along with updated policies, 
procedures and guidance. 

Following the successful launch of 
our refreshed strategies we have 
continued to promote the changes  
and significant investment in making 
ScS a great place to work.

The prior year saw the Group  
enhance employee benefits, including 
the introduction of an employee 
assistance programme. This has  
been promoted during the lockdown 
period to provide our staff with  
a support route.

In collaboration with MHFA England, 
32 mental health first aiders have also 
had training on supporting colleagues 
throughout our business. 

Enhanced personal development 
programme commenced for  
our retail branch and senior 
management teams.

We continue to develop and improve 
our training to identify and close 
training gaps.

45

Following the annual staff survey  
we have responded to staff feedback  
and we update our teams on the 
progress made. 

Staff turnover has reduced by 9.2% 
during the financial year.

We invested and continue to supply 
personal protective equipment  
along with guidance, and a safety  
first programme to ensure staff  
feel confident about coming back  
to their workplace. 

Risk assessments and safe systems 
of work were implemented for all 
areas of the business. Improved staff 
communications were implemented, 
including the use of social media. 
We updated training on COVID-19 
and safety processes for staff in 
preparation for re-start. Where 
possible, staff were set up to work 
remotely from home.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSPrincipal Risks and Uncertainties continued

Key to change in risk level since the previous year:  

  Risk higher (worsened)

  Risk stayed level

  Risk lower (improved) 

Reputational risk

Risk

Risk description

Mitigation

Progress in 2020

Brand and 
reputation

Change in risk level

Link to strategic priorities 
1  Outstanding team
2  Customer experience
7  Improve profitability 

Performance indicator 
Sales performance
Customer feedback

Risk appetite 
Low

46

Risk profile after mitigating 
controls
Low

Responsibility
Board

Reports to
Chief Executive Officer

Brand and reputation
Protecting our brand and reputation  
is key to our success and everything  
we do. The Group recognises that 
failure to effectively protect the brand 
could result in a loss of confidence  
by customers, colleagues and  
other key stakeholders.

During 2020, we have continued to 
focus on customer service and strive 
to achieve the new more aspirational 
targets set by Trustpilot.

We have further promoted our values 
throughout the business, ensuring  
our focus is maintained on making  
ScS a great place to work and shop.

We continued to work closely with  
our suppliers and have established  
an improvement programme for 
product quality. Data from customer 
services and audit results help us  
to guide suppliers through areas  
of focus to drive improvements.  
A continuous improvement framework 
is in place that enables us to work 
with our suppliers to review existing 
products and new products as they  
are introduced into the range. 

Any risk to our brand and reputation 
is monitored closely through various 
channels and regularly reported to the 
Operating Board. Key stakeholder KPIs 
are reported to the Board regularly.

Our retail, compliance, merchandise, 
distribution and aftercare teams all 
have processes in place to monitor and 
adhere to relevant standards, ensuring 
our reputation for a high quality 
product and service is maintained.

We have review processes in place 
to monitor customer service levels 
through Trustpilot and social media 
feedback. We work on product quality 
through discussions with our suppliers 
and we review colleague engagement 
through staff engagement surveys.

We have a long established code  
of conduct, equality and diversity 
policies, and all staff and suppliers  
have access to a confidential  
whistle-blowing helpline.

The integrity of our product sourcing is 
regularly monitored and reviewed with 
our suppliers. 

COVID-19 impact
As a result of COVID-19, a delay in 
orders and deliveries to customers 
may result in reputational damage.

Changes to store layout, required 
under government guidance to allow 
social distancing, may impact on the 
customer’s experience, reduce sales 
and increase costs.

The Group has a dedicated supplier 
management team, who track all 
customer orders including any revised 
delivery dates. This team works with 
our senior management team to 
ensure all delays are communicated  
to our customers as soon as these  
are evident.

All delays on orders taken prior to the 
lockdown period were communicated 
to impacted customers. Customers 
were contacted directly by a member 
of our senior management team.

We have worked with and will continue 
to work with our suppliers to ensure any 
impact can be mitigated. Lead times 
on products are regularly updated to 
ensure customers are aware of any 
extended delivery times at the point 
of order.

We have ensured that every store 
has a ‘meet and greet’ member of 
staff in place to ensure customers are 
reassured and advised on our revised 
shopping experience.

We have installed signage and provided 
personal protective equipment to all 
staff and have followed all government 
guidelines and best practice provided 
by relevant bodies.

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020Key to change in risk level since the previous year:  

  Risk higher (worsened)

  Risk stayed level

  Risk lower (improved) 

Financial risks

Risk

Risk description

Mitigation

Progress in 2020

Credit risk, 
liquidity and 
consumer 
credit  

Change in risk level

Supplier credit
The availability of supplier credit and 
the ability of suppliers to obtain credit 
insurance could have a significant 
impact on our suppliers’ working 
capital requirements, which may have 
a material impact on the Group’s cash 
position and overall financial position.

COVID-19 impact 
There is an increased risk that the 
Group’s credit rating is affected, 
reducing the ability of our suppliers 
being able to obtain credit insurance. 

The Group has had increased dialogue 
in the year with credit insurers.

Suppliers provided regular updates on 
their credit insurance arrangements. 
None of our manufacturing suppliers 
saw a reduction in their credit 
insurance levels.

Despite the impact of COVID-19 
resulting in stores being closed in 
March 2020, the Group continues to 
maintain a strong cash position on its 
balance sheet.

We have developed strong 
relationships and credibility with 
credit insurers through regular 
communication, information, ongoing 
trading performance and the Group’s 
resilience levels. 

We have robust forecasting facilities 
in place that enable early discussion of 
risks, which improves the chances of 
positive solutions for all stakeholders.

Embedded cash-flow forecasting and 
the management and reduction in 
costs allowed the Group to manage 
cash appropriately.

Whilst trading was significantly 
impacted by the lockdown, the Group 
continued to pay our suppliers for 
goods delivered. This has meant that 
post the lockdown period our supply 
chain has been able to re-start. 

47

Link to strategic priorities 
1  Outstanding team
2  Customer experience
4  Sales density
7  Improve profitability 

Performance indicator 
Sales performance
Customer feedback
Cost of consumer finance
Net debt

Risk appetite 
Low

Risk profile after mitigating 
controls
Medium

Responsibility
Chief Financial Officer

Reports to
Chief Executive Officer

Liquidity
Cash generated from business 
activities is used to fund our working 
capital, any reduction or loss of access 
to cash would impact on the ability to 
pay suppliers and continue operations.

The Group’s treasury policy is to have 
a balance sheet that does not rely on 
debt to fund its day-to-day operating 
activities. Targeting to hold sufficient 
cash balances to provide adequate 
liquidity through the economic cycle.

The Group maintains a strong, long 
standing relationship with our bank. A 
£12m revolving credit facility (RCF) was 
in place from January 2015 to August 
2020, when it was replaced with a 
three-year £20m CLBILS facility which 
matures in August 2023. 

Despite the COVID-19 lockdown, 
we continued to maintain a strong 
financial position through careful 
monitoring and management  
of our cash flows.

The Group acted quickly to amend  
the terms of the existing RCF  
to improve covenant headroom,  
and then subsequently replaced  
with an improved facility.

COVID-19 impact
The closure of the stores and 
distribution centres meant the cash 
position of the Group reduced, largely 
due to the unwind of working capital. 
A prolonged period of closure or 
subdued demand post-re-opening 
would reduce liquidity levels further.

Embedded cash-flow forecasting and 
the management and reduction in 
costs allowed the Group to manage 
cash appropriately and engage in 
discussions with its bank as required.

Following the amendment of the 
covenant terms on the existing £12m 
RCF, the Group agreed a new £20m 
CLBILS RCF, which is in place until 
August 2023.

Closing cash increased by £24.6m  
to £82.3m (2019: £57.7m) 

Please see our Viability Statement  
on page 49 for further details.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSPrincipal Risks and Uncertainties continued

Key to change in risk level since the previous year:  

  Risk higher (worsened)

  Risk stayed level

  Risk lower (improved) 

Financial risks continued

Risk

Risk description

Mitigation

Progress in 2020

Credit risk, 
liquidity and 
consumer 
credit continued

Consumer credit
The Group’s ability to offer interest-
free credit to customers may be 
impacted as a result of high default 
levels, increased interest rates or the 
withdrawal or uncompetitive nature 
of consumer credit facilities provided 
by the external finance companies – 
thereby reducing the competitiveness 
of a key part of the Group’s  
customer proposition.

48

COVID-19 impact
Following the lockdown period the 
FCA and government has prompted 
lenders to provide payment holidays to 
customers to assist during the crisis. 
This could lead to an increase in default 
levels when the payments resume. 
This would lead to an increase in risk, 
and therefore, cost to the lender and 
increased costs to the Group if the 
finance companies feel this increase  
in default levels will persist in the 
medium term.

Due to the potential increase in 
unemployment there is a risk of 
acceptance rates falling which would 
mean fewer customers being able  
to use the finance facility to make  
a purchase. 

We work closely with a number of 
finance providers to ensure that we can 
obtain a competitive rate and reduce 
the risk of not being able to offer the 
interest-free proposition.

The Group monitors acceptance rates 
by provider by week to identify and 
challenge any emerging trends.

In order to ensure that we maintain 
our relevant permissions from the 
FCA, we continually monitor relevant 
compliance and work with our  
finance providers to ensure  
that our obligations are met.

Training is provided to retail staff and 
any complaints regarding regulated 
activity are investigated by the  
Audit, Risk and Compliance team  
and reported to the Operating Board.

During 2020, we have worked closely 
with our existing finance providers 
to ensure that we adhere to relevant 
legislation and guidance.

We have maintained our close working 
relationship with our three finance 
providers, and we are in ongoing 
discussions with other potential 
providers to enable us to have a range 
of options available. 

Default levels and acceptance levels 
have remained stable during the year.

We implemented new online training 
for all our retail sales staff.

Due to the strength of the relationships 
held with the finance companies, any 
changes to costs or acceptance rates 
are discussed up front.

The Group’s ongoing discussions with 
other national finance companies 
ensures we can benchmark costs and 
acceptance rates across the UK and 
remain competitive in the marketplace.

Post-lockdown, no increase in  
costs have been proposed by the 
finance companies.

We saw acceptance rates drop slightly 
on re-opening and we have continued 
to monitor this on a weekly basis and 
have seen levels return to normal in  
the new financial year.

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020Viability Statement

The UK Corporate Governance Code requires  
the Group to issue a ‘viability statement’ 
declaring whether we believe the Group can 
continue to operate and meet its liabilities, 
taking into account its current position and 
principal risks in the longer term

49

The Strategic Plan makes certain assumptions 
about the normal level of capital recycling likely 
to occur and therefore considers whether 
additional financing will be required. The Group 
continues to hold a significant cash balance and 
the new undrawn £20.0m CLBILS committed 
revolving credit facility. The facility was entered 
into in August 2020 and extends to August 
2023. The Strategic Plan also encompasses the 
projected cash flows and headroom against 
financial covenants under the Group’s facility.

Conclusion
Based upon this assessment, the Directors have 
a reasonable expectation that the Company 
will be able to continue in operation and meet 
its liabilities as they fall due over the period to 
29 July 2023. In making this statement, the 
Directors have considered the resilience of the 
Group, taking into account its current position 
and the principal risks facing the business.

This strategic report, which has been prepared 
in accordance with the requirements of the 
Companies Act 2006, has been approved and 
signed on behalf of the Board.

David Knight
Chief Executive Officer
1 October 2020

Variable or discretionary total  
Group costs

72%

Undrawn CLBILS committed revolving 
credit facility

£20m

Due to the inherent pace of change in the 
retail environment, and the wider economic 
environment, the Group tends to ensure focus is 
on delivery of short to medium-term goals. The 
strategy and associated principal risks underpin 
the Group’s three-year strategic planning 
process (‘the Strategic Plan’), which is updated 
annually. This process takes into account the 
current and prospective macro-economic 
conditions in the UK and the competitive tension 
that exists within the markets that we trade. Our 
current Strategic Plan has also been revisited in 
light of the more recent impact of COVID-19, 
and the Board believes it remains relevant to 
ensuring success in this period. The period of 
three years, as set out within the Strategic Plan, 
is considered appropriate for business planning, 
measuring performance and aligns with the 
payback requirements of any significant capital 
investment (new stores).

As explained in the Strategic Report, the Group’s 
business model provides customers with 
high quality, competitively priced upholstered 
furniture, flooring and related products. The 
Directors are confident that consumer demand 
for these products will continue to remain in the 
longer term, and that our strategy (see pages 
24 and 25) will ensure our business model will 
continue to bring long-term sustainable success 
to the Group.

Assessment of viability
The Strategic Plan is stress tested for severe 
but plausible scenarios and the effectiveness of 
any mitigating actions that would reasonably be 
taken. Given the current political and economic 
uncertainty, in particular surrounding potential 
further impact of COVID-19, together with the 
changes across the retail sector, it is reasonable 
to expect further volatility in the short term. The 
Strategic Plan was therefore specifically stress 
tested against the key risks identified within the 
plan, with attention to the principal risks and 
uncertainties highlighted on pages 36 to 48.  
This included the modelling of:
 – A second extended nationwide lockdown;
 – Various severities of downturn in revenue;
 – Various severities of downturns in  

gross margin;

 – The withdrawal of supplier credit insurance 
(inclusive of the above downturns); and

 – A combination of all of the above.

Due primarily to the flexible nature of the cost 
structure of the Group, and additionally to the 
significant cash reserves held currently, the 
outcome of this stress testing satisfied the 
Directors with respect to the ongoing liquidity 
and solvency of the Group over the three-year 
period under review. 72% of total Group costs 
are either variable or discretionary and as such, 
even in difficult trading conditions, these costs 
would also reduce. The Group has also excluded 
any potential further assistance from the UK 
government. These reductions, together with 
relevant mitigating actions and significant 
cash reserves, would ensure the Group could 
continue to meet its liabilities. Further to the 
above examples, the Directors are comfortable 
that the work done to minimise the risk to the 
supply chain, chiefly ensuring the use of a variety 
of suppliers, and ensuring multiple factories are 
able to produce similar product ranges, would be 
sufficient to limit the effect on the Group should 
that risk occur. 

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSBoard of Directors

Alan Smith 
Non-Executive Chairman

Date of appointment

22 October 2014

Committee membership

N   R
Biography

David Knight 
Chief Executive Officer

Chris Muir 
Chief Financial Officer

Ron McMillan 

Non-Executive Director

George Adams 

Non-Executive Director

Angela Luger

Non-Executive Director

1 January 2002

4 April 2016

22 October 2014

9 July 2015

A   R   N

R   A   N

16 May 2019

A   N   R

Alan has held a number of roles for retail 
companies across the private equity and 
quoted sector previously, including Chairman 
and Chief Executive Officer of Robert Dyas, 
Chief Executive Officer of Somerfield, CEO 
of Evans Halshaw plc, Group and Managing 
Director of B&Q plc.

50

David joined ScS in 1988 as a General Manager 
from Wades Department Stores, which he 
joined in 1978. He progressed to become the 
Branch Manager of the Group’s flagship store, 
located at the Metro Centre in Gateshead.  
He became National Sales Manager in October 
1995 and was appointed to the Board in 
November 1997 as Merchandising Director.  
In October 1999 he was promoted to the 
position of Managing Director, then to  
Chief Executive Officer in January 2002.

Chris joined ScS as Chief Financial Officer 
in April 2016. He is a chartered accountant, 
qualifying in 1999 whilst working at Deloitte.  
In 2003, he joined Northgate plc, Europe’s 
leading specialist in light commercial vehicle 
hire, as the Group Accountant and held a 
number of senior UK and group roles, including 
UK Finance Director and acting group CEO  
in the summer of 2014. Prior to joining ScS  
he was Group Finance Director of Northgate. 

Key strengths

Retail, finance, strategy, marketing

Retail, strategy, marketing, supply chain

Financial and risk management, investor  
and banking experience, restructuring,  
change management

External appointments

The Navy, Army and Air Force Institutes
The Royal Air Force Charitable  
Trust Enterprises
The Royal Air Force Charitable Trust
Brambledown Aircraft Hire

Executive/Non-Executive

Board tenure

Ron is the Senior Independent Director and 

George has a strong commercial and 

Angela is the Chair of The Paint Shed Ltd, she 

Chairman of the Audit Committee of N Brown 

management background, with over 30 years 

is also Non-Executive Director for New Look 

Group plc and B&M European Value Retail S.A. 

of international experience across Europe 

Ltd and Portmerion Group plc. Angela began 

He is a Non-Executive Director and Chairman 

and Asia. George is the Chair of FFX ltd and 

her career in FMCG marketing with Cadbury’s, 

of the Audit Committee of Homeserve plc. 

Bradford and Sons ltd, he is also Non-Executive 

Coca Cola and Mars, prior to moving into retail. 

Previously Ron worked in PwC’s assurance 

Director for Nobia AB and Stiga SA.

business for 38 years and has deep knowledge 

She spent 10 years at Asda, holding a variety of 

positions including Trading Director and Global 

and experience of auditing, financial reporting 

George spent 16 years with Kingfisher 

Managing Director for George. She was MD 

issues and governance. As the Northern 

plc, in roles which included CEO of Europe 

of Debenhams, CEO of The Original Factory 

Regional Chairman of PwC in the UK and 

Development, Group Commercial Director 

Shop and most recently was the CEO of N 

Deputy Chairman of PwC in the Middle East,  

and Commercial Managing Director for B&Q. 

Brown Group plc, where she led the business 

he acted as engagement leader to a number  

He has also held CEO positions at Spicers 

through a significant digital transformation. 

of major listed companies, including many  

Group and Maxeda DIY Group and has both plc 

Angela has significant experience in marketing, 

and private equity experience in the retail and 

e-commerce and retail, including leveraging 

consumer goods sector.

technology to optimise a value retail offering.

Finance, financial reporting, governance,  

Retail, strategy, marketing, supply chain

Retail, marketing, digital, strategy

in the retail sector.

risk management

N Brown Group plc

B&M European Value Retail S.A.

Homeserve plc

FFX Ltd

Nobia AB

Stiga S.A.

Bradford and Sons Limited

Portmerion Group plc

The Paint Shed Holdings Limited

New Look Retailers Limited

The Hiring Hub Holdings Limited

Majelan Limited

  Chairman

  Chief Financial Officer

  1-5 years

  15 years+

  Chief Executive

  Non-Executives

  5-15 years

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020Alan Smith 

Non-Executive Chairman

Date of appointment

22 October 2014

Committee membership

N   R

Biography

David Knight 

Chief Executive Officer

Chris Muir 

Chief Financial Officer

Ron McMillan 
Non-Executive Director

George Adams 
Non-Executive Director

Angela Luger
Non-Executive Director

1 January 2002

4 April 2016

22 October 2014

9 July 2015

A   R   N

R   A   N

16 May 2019

A   N   R

Alan has held a number of roles for retail 

David joined ScS in 1988 as a General Manager 

Chris joined ScS as Chief Financial Officer 

companies across the private equity and 

from Wades Department Stores, which he 

in April 2016. He is a chartered accountant, 

quoted sector previously, including Chairman 

joined in 1978. He progressed to become the 

qualifying in 1999 whilst working at Deloitte.  

and Chief Executive Officer of Robert Dyas, 

Branch Manager of the Group’s flagship store, 

In 2003, he joined Northgate plc, Europe’s 

Chief Executive Officer of Somerfield, CEO 

located at the Metro Centre in Gateshead.  

leading specialist in light commercial vehicle 

of Evans Halshaw plc, Group and Managing 

He became National Sales Manager in October 

hire, as the Group Accountant and held a 

Director of B&Q plc.

1995 and was appointed to the Board in 

number of senior UK and group roles, including 

November 1997 as Merchandising Director.  

UK Finance Director and acting group CEO  

In October 1999 he was promoted to the 

in the summer of 2014. Prior to joining ScS  

he was Group Finance Director of Northgate. 

position of Managing Director, then to  

Chief Executive Officer in January 2002.

Ron is the Senior Independent Director and 
Chairman of the Audit Committee of N Brown 
Group plc and B&M European Value Retail S.A. 
He is a Non-Executive Director and Chairman 
of the Audit Committee of Homeserve plc. 
Previously Ron worked in PwC’s assurance 
business for 38 years and has deep knowledge 
and experience of auditing, financial reporting 
issues and governance. As the Northern 
Regional Chairman of PwC in the UK and 
Deputy Chairman of PwC in the Middle East,  
he acted as engagement leader to a number  
of major listed companies, including many  
in the retail sector.

George has a strong commercial and 
management background, with over 30 years 
of international experience across Europe 
and Asia. George is the Chair of FFX ltd and 
Bradford and Sons ltd, he is also Non-Executive 
Director for Nobia AB and Stiga SA.

George spent 16 years with Kingfisher 
plc, in roles which included CEO of Europe 
Development, Group Commercial Director 
and Commercial Managing Director for B&Q. 
He has also held CEO positions at Spicers 
Group and Maxeda DIY Group and has both plc 
and private equity experience in the retail and 
consumer goods sector.

Angela is the Chair of The Paint Shed Ltd, she 
is also Non-Executive Director for New Look 
Ltd and Portmerion Group plc. Angela began 
her career in FMCG marketing with Cadbury’s, 
Coca Cola and Mars, prior to moving into retail. 
She spent 10 years at Asda, holding a variety of 
positions including Trading Director and Global 
Managing Director for George. She was MD 
of Debenhams, CEO of The Original Factory 
Shop and most recently was the CEO of N 
Brown Group plc, where she led the business 
through a significant digital transformation. 
Angela has significant experience in marketing, 
e-commerce and retail, including leveraging 
technology to optimise a value retail offering.

51

Retail, finance, strategy, marketing

Retail, strategy, marketing, supply chain

Financial and risk management, investor  

Finance, financial reporting, governance,  
risk management

Retail, strategy, marketing, supply chain

Retail, marketing, digital, strategy

and banking experience, restructuring,  

change management

N Brown Group plc
B&M European Value Retail S.A.
Homeserve plc

FFX Ltd
Nobia AB
Stiga S.A.
Bradford and Sons Limited

Portmerion Group plc
The Paint Shed Holdings Limited
New Look Retailers Limited
The Hiring Hub Holdings Limited
Majelan Limited

Key strengths

External appointments

The Navy, Army and Air Force Institutes

The Royal Air Force Charitable  

Trust Enterprises

The Royal Air Force Charitable Trust

Brambledown Aircraft Hire

Committee membership key
A   Audit Committee Chair
A   Audit Committee Member
R   Remuneration Committee Chair
R   Remuneration Committee Member
N   Nomination Committee Chair
N   Nomination Committee Member

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSCorporate Governance Statement

52

 “Whilst we are facing 

unprecedented 
times; good corporate 
governance remains 
an essential part of our 
Group operations.”

Alan Smith
Chairman

Role of the Board
The Board is committed to high standards 
of corporate governance. The Group has 
complied and intends to continue to comply 
with the requirements of the 2018 UK Corporate 
Governance Code, a copy of the Code is 
available on the FRC’s website: www.frc.org.uk.

The Group is led and controlled by the Board 
which is collectively responsible for the long-term 
sustainable success of the Group. The Board 
focuses on the Group’s purpose, values and 
strategy and on its performance and governance. 
The Board has delegated certain responsibilities 
to committees to assist in discharging its duties 
and the implementation of matters approved by 
the Board. A summary of the terms of reference 
of each Committee is set out on page 54 and the 
Audit and Remuneration Committee reports are 
set out on pages 57 to 73. 

Detailed implementation of matters approved 
by the Board and operational day-to-day matters 
are delegated to the Executive Directors. The 
Executive Directors are also supported by an 
experienced and able senior management team. 
All Directors have access to the Group Secretary, 
whose appointment and removal is one of the 
matters reserved for the Board.

Stakeholder engagement
The Board appreciates the importance of 
engaging with the Group’s stakeholders and 
having regard to their interests in its decision 
making process. The welfare and interests 
of our colleagues and customers during 
the coronavirus pandemic have been of 
paramount importance. At each scheduled 
meeting, the Board reviews key performance 
indicators relating to suppliers, employees and 
customers as well as movements in the Group’s 
shareholders. Regular update reports are 
provided to the Board by the designated Non-
Executive Workforce Engagement Director, 
George Adams, who holds regular discussion 
forums with members of the wider workforce 
to ensure that the Board is engaging with 
colleagues and to provide them with a direct 
route to raise issues or concerns with the Board.

During the year, members of the Board, 
including the Chair, have attended regular 
meetings with the Group’s suppliers, 
shareholders and employees. Members of  
the Board regularly visit the Group’s stores  
and distribution centres and have particularly 
done so following the re-opening under 
coronavirus restrictions, in order to form their 
own assessment of the in-store experience  
and working environment, for colleagues  
and customers.

Details of the stakeholder interests, which the 
Board has considered in its normal business 
operations during the year and in the period 
from the on-set of the coronavirus pandemic, 
are set out in the Section 172 Statement and 
Stakeholder Report on pages 32 and 33, and  
the Risk and Risk Management section on  
pages 34 and 35.

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020Structure chart

Executive  
Directors

Operating  
Company Board

Culture and values
The Board considers and monitors how the 
Group’s values of being a responsive, inclusive, 
getting it right, hardworking and trusted retailer 
of sofas and carpets are reflected in the way in 
which the Group operates. The Group’s vision is 
to be Britain’s best value sofa and carpet retailer, 
making it easy for our customers to love their 
home. Our values and purpose reflect how  
the Group operates culturally as a business  
and how we engage with our stakeholders.

The Board recognises the importance of 
ensuring a healthy and supportive culture 
within the Group. The Board monitors culture 
and values in a number of ways, including 
undertaking an annual survey of all employees, 
undertaking pulse surveys throughout the 
year on specific topics, reviewing feedback 
through Director discussion groups, as well as 
reviewing feedback provided by our customers 
through forums such as Trustpilot and Google 
My Business. All employees are able to access 
a confidential helpline operated by Safecall 
should they want to report any wrongdoing 
anonymously. The Board are provided with 
insight into any calls that are made. We also have 
a dedicated, free to use employee assistance 

Group Board

Committees

Audit

Remuneration

Nomination

programme, where employees can gain access 
to help and support on a whole range of personal 
issues including mental health and financial 
worries. The Group works with Sedex to improve 
working conditions for employees of the Group’s 
suppliers and responsibly source its supplies.

Matters reserved for the Board
A formal schedule of matters is reserved  
for the Board, which includes the Board:
 – Having responsibility for the overall 

 – Ensuring effective engagement with and 

encouraging participation from shareholders 
and other stakeholders;

 – Understanding the views of the  

Group’s key stakeholders, including  
the workforce, and setting and reviewing 
engagement mechanisms;

 – Approving the structure, size and 
composition of the Board and the 
remuneration policy for all Directors  
and senior management; 

leadership of the Group to promote its long-
term sustainability, establishing its purpose, 
values and strategy and ensuring that these 
and its culture are aligned;

 – Reviewing workforce remuneration and 
related policies and the alignment of 
incentives and rewards with culture;
 – Aligning executive remuneration to the 

53

 – Approving any changes to the capital 

structure of the Group;

 – Approving financial reporting, budgets, 

dividend policy and any significant changes  
in accounting policies and practices of  
the Group; 

 – Establishing procedures to manage risk, 

oversee the internal control framework and 
determining the nature and extent of the 
risk appetite of the Group is willing to take to 
achieve its long-term strategic objectives;
 – Approving of any major capital projects and 

materially significant contracts for the Group;

Directors’ attendance
The Board held twelve meetings during the 2020 financial year and attendance at the meetings was 
as follows:

PLC

Audit Committee

Remuneration 
Committee

Nomination 
Committee

Total no. of meetings

David Knight

Chris Muir

Alan Smith

Ron McMillan

George Adams

Angela Luger

Paul Daccus*

12

12

12

12

12

12

12

3

3

–

–

–

3

3

3

–

5

–

–

5

5

5

5

–

1

–

–

1

1

1

1

–

Further meetings of the Board, Audit, Remuneration and Nomination Committees have also been held since the year end. 

*  Paul Daccus stepped down from the Board on 11 February 2020 in connection with the sale by Parlour Products 

Holdings (LUX) S.A.R.L of its entire holding in the Group.

Group’s purpose and values and ensuring 
that it is clearly linked to delivery of the 
Group’s long-term strategy;

 – Agreeing the responsibilities of the Chair 
of the Board, the Chief Executive, Senior 
Independent Director, the Board and  
its Committees;

 – Undertaking a formal and rigorous annual 
review of the performance of the Board, 
its Committees, the Chairman, individual 
Directors and corporate governance 
matters; and

 – Approving and supervising of any material 
litigation and appointing the Group’s 
professional advisors.

There is a rolling programme of Board meetings 
throughout the year and there are six Board 
meetings presently scheduled for 2021.  
In 2020, meetings were held between the six 
scheduled meetings, as circumstances required. 
The Board will continue to meet on this basis,  
when circumstances require. 

All Board and Committee members receive 
sets of Board packs in advance of the Board and 
Committee meetings. For scheduled Board 
meetings this includes progress on strategy, 
current trading, stakeholder KPIs, management 
accounts and detailed papers on other matters 
where Board approval is required. The CEO 
and CFO present reports to the Board at 
each scheduled meeting on trading, financial 
performance and operational matters, along 
with updates on any significant health and 
safety, litigation or regulatory matters. For Board 

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTS54

Corporate Governance Statement continued

meetings which are held as circumstances 
require, the Board packs reflect the agenda  
of the meeting, but generally the CEO and CFO 
will still present reports to the Board on trading, 
financial performance and operational matters, 
as well as in respect of the other matters for the 
consideration of the Board at the meeting.

Composition of the Board
Following Paul Daccus stepping down from the 
Board on 11 February 2020, in connection with 
the sale by Parlour Products Holdings (LUX) 
S.A.R.L of its entire holding in the Group, the 
Board has comprised of the Non-Executive 
Chairman, two Executive Directors and three 
independent Non-Executive Directors.

The Board’s composition is compliant with  
the 2018 Corporate Governance Code.

The 2018 UK Corporate Governance Code 
recommends that at least half of the Board, 
excluding the Chair, should be Non-Executive 
Directors whom the Board considers to 
be independent. The Group has met this 
requirement and Ron McMillan (Senior 
Independent Director), appointed 22 October 
2014, George Adams, appointed 9 July 2015, 
and Angela Luger, appointed 16 May 2019 
are all considered by the Group to meet the 
definition of an independent Director. Each 
of them is considered by the Board to be 
independent in character and judgement and 
free from relationships or circumstances which 
may affect, or could appear to affect, their 
judgement. Independence is determined by 
ensuring that the Non-Executive Directors do 
not have any material business relationships or 
arrangements (apart from their fees for acting 
as Non-Executive Directors) with the Group or 
its Directors which in the opinion of the Board 
could affect their independent judgement.

All Directors have service agreements or letters 
of appointment in place and the details of the 
terms of these are set out in the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report on pages 62 to 73.

The Nomination Committee will review on an 
annual basis the Board’s composition, experience 
and skills to ensure the effective working of the 
Board and its Committees and the commitment 
of their members. The Chairman has met with 
each of the Non-Executive Directors during 
the year on a one-to-one basis, without the 
Executive Directors being present, to discuss 
matters relating to the Board, its balance and the 
monitoring powers of the Executive Directors. 

The Chairman believes the current Board and 
its Committees have an appropriate balance 
of skills and experience to enable them to 
discharge their responsibilities effectively. 
The development of the Group’s Directors is 
regularly reviewed and the Chairman discusses 
training requirements with each Director.

Where Directors have external appointments, 
the Board is satisfied that they do not impact  
on the time they need to devote to the Group.

Division of responsibilities
The positions of Chairman and CEO are 
occupied by different individuals. There is a clear 
division of roles and responsibilities between  
the Chairman and the CEO and no individual  
has unrestricted powers of decision making.

Alan Smith, as Chairman of the Board, is 
responsible for leading the Board, setting its 
agenda and overseeing its effectiveness in 
directing the Group. The Chairman facilitates 
the contribution of the Non-Executive Directors 
and constructive relations between them  
and the Executive Directors and ensures  
that Directors receive accurate, timely and  
clear information.

David Knight as CEO, together with Chris 
Muir as CFO, is responsible for the day-to 
day management of the Group and the 
implementation of strategies approved 
by the Board as well as or along with the 
implementation of other Board decisions.

Diversity
The Group is satisfied overall with its record on 
diversity, and is aware of the need to monitor 
and review its level of diversity. Whilst the Group 
would have preferred to have a more diverse 
Board, appointments will always be made on 
merit and objective criteria as opposed to  
on the basis of gender targets, and this is 
considered in the best interests of the Group 
and its shareholders. 

Conflicts of interest
There are no potential conflicts of interest 
between any of the Directors or senior 
management within the Group and their  
private interests.

There is an established process of the Board for 
regularly reviewing actual or potential conflicts 
of interest. In particular, there is a process for 
reviewing transactions proposed to be entered 
into by related parties of Directors with any 
entities in the Group, including professional 
advice and consideration of it by the Board 
and the Group’s corporate brokers on the 
application of the Listing Rules, the applicability 
and the appropriateness of any exemptions 
in respect of any transactions in the ordinary 
course of business and reporting to general 
meetings of shareholders under England and 
Wales Group Law. This process also includes 
consideration of the extent to which the Board 
may require external and any other reports 
and evaluations to be presented to it on any 
proposed transactions.

Committees of the Board
The Board has established and delegated 
authority to an Audit Committee, a 
Remuneration Committee and a Nomination 
Committee. A summary of the terms of 
reference of each of these Committees is set 
out below. The full terms of reference of each 
of the Committees is available at ScS Group plc 
head office or online at scsplc.co.uk.

Sub-committee responsibilities
Audit Committee
 – Financial reporting
 – External audit
 – Risk management and internal audit
 – Fraud and anti-bribery
 – Going concern and viability
 – Data protection

Remuneration Committee
 – Chairman and Executive  
Director remuneration

 – Senior management remuneration
 – Review of workforce remuneration  

and policies
 – Bonus schemes
 – Long-term incentive plans
 – Non-Executive Director pay

Nomination Committee
 – Board structure
 – Board appointments
 – Board succession plans
 – Senior management appointments

Audit Committee
The Audit Committee is chaired by Ron 
McMillan. The duties of the Audit Committee 
as delegated by the Board are contained in the 
terms of reference available at ScS Group plc 
head office or online at scsplc.co.uk, which in 
summary include:
 – Monitoring the quality, effectiveness, 

independence and objectivity of the external 
auditors, approving their appointment,  
re-appointment and fee levels;

 – Reviewing and monitoring the integrity 
of the financial statements, any formal 
announcements relating to financial 
performance and reviewing significant 
financial reporting judgements contained 
in them; 

 – Monitoring and reviewing the  

effectiveness of the Internal Audit,  
Risk and Compliance function;

 – Assisting the Board with the development 
and execution of a risk management 
strategy, risk policies and current and 
emerging risk exposures, including the 
maintenance of the Group’s risk register; 
 – Providing advice (where requested by the 
Board) on whether the Annual Report and 
accounts, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced 
and understandable, and providing the 
information necessary for shareholders to 
assess the Group’s position and performance, 
business model and strategy; and

 – Keeping under review the adequacy and 
effectiveness of the Group’s internal 
financial controls and internal control and risk 
management systems.

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020Nomination Committee
The Nomination Committee comprises all of the 
Non-Executive Directors. It is chaired by Alan 
Smith and its other members are Ron McMillan, 
George Adams and Angela Luger.

The duties of the Nomination Committee as 
delegated to it by the Board are contained in the 
terms of reference available at ScS Group plc 
head office or online at scsplc.co.uk, which in 
summary include:
 – Reviewing the structure, size and 

composition of the Board, including  
the balance of Executive and  
Non-Executive Directors;

 – Putting in place plans for the orderly 

succession of appointments to the Board 
and to senior management positions;
 – Overseeing the development of a diverse 

pipeline for succession; and

 – Identifying and nominating candidates 

for the approval of the Board, to fill Board 
vacancies when they arise.

The Committee meets at least annually.

During the 2020 financial year the  
Nomination Committee: 
 – Reviewed the size, structure and 

composition of the Board, with regard 
to the experience, skills and knowledge 
represented on it and the balance of 
Executive and Non-Executive Directors 
represented on it; 

 – Considered the succession planning for 

Board and senior management positions; and 

 – Commenced the process of finding a 

successor to David Knight, as the Group’s 
CEO, further to the Group’s announcements 
concerned with his retirement. This 
has involved agreeing a comprehensive 
specification for the desired candidate and 
ensuring the role brief was aligned to the 
desired Board composition.

The Committee recognises the need to 
keep under review certain areas where over 
the course of time, appointments may be 
appropriate to consider. The Nomination 
Committee also recognises the need to monitor 
and review diversity of gender, social and ethnic 
backgrounds and cognitive and personal 
strengths in relation to how the Group is led and 
represented. Appointments will always be made 
on merit and objective criteria, recognising 
our diversity policy but without setting gender 
targets and this is considered to be in the best 
interests of the Group and its shareholders.  
The Board currently has one female Board 
member out of six members (16.7%). The 
Group’s Operating Board has one female 
member out of six members (16.7%). 

Board performance evaluation
Following last year’s externally facilitated 
evaluation by Fiseq Limited, the 2020 
evaluation of the performance of the Board, 
its Committees, the Chair and the individual 
Directors was conducted by the Group’s Internal 
Audit Team. The evaluation confirmed that 
the Board and its Committees have a good 
balance of knowledge and experience and did 
not identify any concerns with performance, 
although opportunities were identified to 
further develop the role of the Board to ensure  
a progressive and performance-led approach.

In accordance with the 2018 UK Corporate 
Governance Code, the Group will continue to 
undertake annual evaluations and at least once 
every three years with an external consultant 
facilitating the evaluation.

Re-election of Directors
Based on the performance review by the 
Nomination Committee of the size, structure 
and composition of the Board with regard to 
the experience and skills represented on it, the 
Nomination Committee has recommended 
that each of the Directors be re-elected to the 
Board, as they each continue to be effective 
members of the Board and demonstrate 
commitment to their roles.

Risk management and internal control
The Board has overall responsibility for ensuring 
that the Group maintains a strong system of 
internal control.

The system of internal control is designed to 
identify, manage and evaluate, rather than 
eliminate, the risk of failing to achieve business 
objectives. It can therefore provide reasonable, 
but not absolute assurance against material 
misstatement, loss or failure to meet objectives 
of the business due to the inherent limitations  
of any such system.

The key elements of the Group’s system  
of internal controls are as follows:

Financial reporting: Monthly management 
accounts are provided to members of the 
Board, which contain current financial reports. 
Reporting includes an analysis of actual versus 
budgeted and prior year performance and 
reasons for any significant differences.  
The annual budget is reviewed and approved  
by the Board. The Group reports half-yearly  
and publishes trading updates in line with  
market practice.

55

The members of the Audit Committee are Ron 
McMillan (Chair), George Adams and Angela 
Luger. Ron McMillan is an ICAEW chartered 
accountant and his experience formally as an 
audit partner of PwC fulfils the requirement 
under the UK Corporate Governance Code  
that one member of the Committee has recent 
and relevant financial experience. 

The Committee as a whole has competence 
relevant to the retail sector, in which we operate.

In compliance with the 2018 Corporate 
Governance Code, Alan Smith, as Chairman of 
the Board, ceased to be a member of the Audit 
Committee with effect from the start of the 
2020 financial year but continues to attend the 
Audit Committee meetings, along with David 
Knight and Chris Muir, by invitation.

The Audit Committee meets not less than 
three times a year. Details of the activities of the 
Committee in the last financial year are set out 
on pages 57 to 61. 

Remuneration Committee
The Remuneration Committee is chaired by 
George Adams. The duties of the Remuneration 
Committee as delegated to it by the Board are 
contained in the terms of reference available  
at ScS Group plc head office or online at  
scsplc.co.uk, which in summary include:
 – Setting the policy for the Group on executive 
remuneration and setting remuneration  
for the Chair, the Executive Directors and 
senior management;

 – Reviewing workforce remuneration and 
related policies and the alignment of 
incentives and rewards with culture, and 
taking these into account when setting the 
policy for Executive Director remuneration; 
 – Preparing an annual Directors’ Remuneration 
Report for approval by shareholders at the 
Annual General Meeting of the Group;

 – Reviewing the design of all share  

incentive plans for approval by the  
Board and/or shareholders;

 – Determining and monitoring any share 

ownership requirements for the Executive 
Directors and senior management including 
post-employment requirements;
 – Determining the policy for termination 

payments and compensation payments 
for the Executive Directors and senior 
management; and

 – Determining the policy for, and scope of, 
pension arrangements for the Executive 
Directors and senior management, and 
aligning the same with those available  
to the Group’s wider workforce.

The members of the Remuneration Committee 
are George Adams (Chair), Alan Smith,  
Ron McMillan and Angela Luger. 

The Remuneration Committee meets not less 
than twice a year. Details of the activities of the 
Committee in the last financial year are set out 
on pages 62 to 73.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSCorporate Governance Statement continued

Compliance statement
The Group has complied with the provisions  
of the 2018 Corporate Governance Code  
during 2020.

Shareholder relations
The Board recognises that good 
communication is key to maintaining 
shareholder relations, and as such we will 
endeavour to explain our actions and financial 
results on a regular basis and to respond  
to investor inquiries and feedback.

Meetings and calls are regularly made with 
institutional investors and analysts in order  
to provide the best quality information to  
the market.

The Group will communicate with its 
shareholders through the Annual General 
Meeting, at which the Chairman will give an 
account of the progress of the business over 
the past year, and will provide the opportunity 
for shareholders to raise questions with 
the Chairman and the Chairs of each of the 
Committees of the Board.

The Group also runs a corporate website at 
scsplc.co.uk, which is regularly updated with our 
releases to the market and other information 
and which includes a copy of this Annual Report. 

Alan Smith
Chairman
1 October 2020

Risk management: The Group maintains a 
risk register, which is continually updated and 
monitored, with full reviews occurring three 
times a year. Each risk identified on the risk 
register is allocated an owner, at least at the  
level of senior manager within the business.  
The action required (where necessary)  
or acceptance of the risk is also recorded.  
The risk registers are provided to the Board.  
Key risks and appropriate mitigating actions  
are monitored by the Board.

Information on principal risks and uncertainties 
of the Group are set out on pages 36 to 48. 
During the 2020 financial year the Board 
has carried out a robust assessment of the 
principal and emerging risks facing the Group 
and has also conducted an annual review of the 
effectiveness of the systems of internal control. 
Please refer to page 34 in the Strategic Report 
for further information.

Monitoring of controls: There are formal 
policies and procedures in place to ensure  
the integrity and accuracy of accounting  
records of the Group and to safeguard its  
assets. The Board has carried out a review  
of the effectiveness of the risk management 
and internal controls during the year ended 
25 July 2020 and for the period up to the date 
of approving the Annual Report and Financial 
Statements. The Board was satisfied after 
a review of the key risks to the business and 
relevant mitigating actions that they were 
acceptable for a business of the type, size and 
complexity as that operated by the Group.

Internal audit: The Group has an established 
Internal Audit, Risk and Compliance function 
which is responsible for the monitoring of 
the Group’s risk management approach and 
provides a link between operational managers 
and the Audit Committee.

Staff policies: There are formal policies in 
place in relation to anti-bribery, corruption and 
whistle-blowing, in relation to the reporting of 
any suspected malpractice or wrongdoing. In 
addition, the Group has provided all employees 
with access to an independent organisation 
(Safecall) where any concerns regarding 
wrongdoing can be reported to the Group 
anonymously. 

56

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020Audit Committee Report

 “The Audit Committee 
advises the Board on 
financial reporting, 
viability and going 
concern and whether the 
Annual Report provides 
shareholders with the 
information necessary 
to assess the Group’s 
performance. It also 
monitors risks and  
risk mitigation.”

Ron McMillan
Chair of the Audit Committee

57

Dear Shareholder
The Audit Committee is integral to the Group’s 
governance framework and continues to 
keep its activities under review to reflect 
regulatory developments and best practice. 
The Audit Committee advises the Board on 
financial reporting, viability and going concern 
and whether the Annual Report provides the 
shareholders with the information necessary 
to assess the Group’s performance. It also 
monitors risks and risk mitigation.

In so doing, the Committee exercises 
oversight of the Group’s financial policies 
and reporting, monitors the integrity of the 
financial statements and reviews and considers 
significant financial and accounting estimates 
and judgements. The Committee satisfies itself 
that the disclosures in the financial statements 
about these estimates and judgements are 
appropriate and obtains from the external 
auditor an independent view of the key 
disclosure issues and risks.

Whilst risk management is a Board responsibility, 
the Committee has continued to work closely 
with the Board and Group management to 
ensure that all significant risks, including 
those which have arisen from COVID-19, are 
considered on an ongoing basis and that all 
communications with shareholders are properly 
considered. In relation to risks and controls, 
the Committee ensures that these have been 
identified and that appropriate responsibilities 
and accountabilities have been set.

A key responsibility of the Committee is to 
review the scope of work undertaken by the 
internal and external auditors and to consider 
their effectiveness.

During the year, the Committee again oversaw 
the process used by the Board to assess the 
viability of the Group, the stress testing of key 
trading assumptions and the preparation of the 
viability statement which is set out on page 49 
in the Principal Risks section of the Strategic 
Report. The Committee also continued to 
monitor the implementation of IFRS 16.

The Committee has considered the narrative 
in the Strategic Report and whether the 
2020 Annual Report is fair, balanced and 
understandable and whether it provides the 
necessary information to shareholders to 
assess the Group’s performance, business 
model and strategy. The Committee considered 
management’s assessment of items 
included in the financial statements and the 
prominence given to them. The Committee, 
and subsequently the Board, were satisfied that, 
taken as a whole, the 2020 Annual Report and 
Accounts are fair, balanced and understandable.

The Committee reviewed, on behalf of the 
Board, the Group’s compliance with the Modern 
Slavery Act and its policies in relation to money 
laundering and anti-bribery.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSAudit Committee Report continued

Going forward, I shall ensure that the 
Committee continues to acknowledge and 
embrace its role of protecting the interests 
of shareholders in regards to the integrity 
of published financial information and the 
effectiveness of audit. I am available to speak 
with shareholders at any time and shall be 
available at the Annual General Meeting in 
November to answer any questions you may 
have on this report. I would like to thank my 
colleagues on the Committee for their help  
and support during the year.

Ron McMillan
Chair of the Audit Committee
1 October 2020

58

Member and meetings attended in 2020

Member since

Meetings attended

Ron McMillan (Chairman)

George Adams

Angela Luger

2014

2015

2019

3

3

3

The Audit Committee met three times during the year. Details of the Committee members’ 
attendance are noted above. 

Committee composition
The Committee comprises three members, all of 
whom are independent Non-Executive Directors. 
Two members constitute a quorum and the 
Committee must include one financially qualified 
member with recent and relevant financial 
experience. The Committee Chairman fulfils 
this requirement. All members are expected to 
have an understanding of financial reporting, the 
Group’s internal control environment, relevant 
corporate legislation, the roles and functions 
of internal audit and external audit and the 
regulatory framework of the business. 

The members of the Committee during the 
year were Ron McMillan, George Adams and 
Angela Luger. Details of Committee meetings 
and attendance are set out in the Corporate 
Governance Statement on page 53. The timing 
of Committee meetings is set to accommodate 
the dates of releases of financial information 
and the approval of the scope and outputs from 
work programmes executed by the internal 
and external auditors. The biographies of the 
members of the Committee can be found on 
pages 50 and 51 and reflect the significant 
experience that the Committee members have 
of working in or with companies in the retail and 
consumer goods sectors.

Although not members of the Committee, Alan 
Smith, as Group Chairman, David Knight, as 
CEO and Chris Muir, as CFO, attend meetings, 
together with representatives from the internal 
audit function and the external auditors.

In addition to scheduled meetings, the 
Committee Chairman meets with the Head of 
Audit, Risk & Compliance, the external auditors 
and the CFO during the year, and the internal 
and external auditors are provided with the 
opportunity to raise any matters of concern that 
they may have in the absence of the Executive 
Directors whether at the Committee meetings, 
or more informally, outside of them.

The Committee critically evaluates its own 
performance on an annual basis and considers 
where improvements can be made.

Responsibilities
The responsibilities of the Committee, as 
delegated by the Board, are set out in the terms 
of reference which are published on the Group’s 
corporate website. They include the following: 
 – Reviewing the integrity of the financial 

statements and other price sensitive financial 
releases of the Group and the significant 
financial judgements and estimates  
related thereto;

 – Monitoring the quality, effectiveness and 

independence of the external auditors and 
approving their appointment and fees;
 – Monitoring the independence and activities  

of the Internal Audit function;

 – Assisting the Board with the development 
and execution of a risk management 
strategy, risk policies and current risk 
exposures, including the maintenance  
of the Group’s risk register; and

 – Keeping under review the adequacy and 
effectiveness of the Group’s internal  
financial controls and internal control  
and risk management system.

Activities
In discharging its oversight of the matters 
referred to above and in the introductory  
letter to this report, the Committee was  
assisted by management and the internal  
and external auditors. 

The recurring work of the Committee comprised:
 – Consideration of the Annual Report and 
financial statements of the Group;

 – Consideration of the Interim Results report 
and non-statutory financial statements  
of the Group for the half year;

 – Consideration of the significant areas of 
accounting estimation or judgement;

 – Consideration of the principal risks included  

in the Annual Report;

 – Consideration of going concern and viability 

issues and the related disclosures; 
 – Approval of the external auditors’ terms  
of reference, audit plan and fees; and

 – Approval of the Internal Audit Plan.

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020The meetings at which the above and certain other matters were discussed were as follows:

Review of Interim Results

Review of Annual Report; approval of Audit Committee report, consideration of significant areas of accounting 

estimation or judgement and whether the Annual Report is fair, balance and understandable

Review of management representations

Review and approval of Internal Audit Plan, reports and updates

Approval of the external audit strategy and fees

Update on the provision of any non-audit services and fees provided by the external auditors

Effectiveness of the Internal Audit function

Effectiveness of the external audit 

Risk management update and review of related disclosures, including warranty risk and COVID-19

Review of internal control processes and related disclosures

Review of disaster recovery practices

Review of Group IT systems 

Update on the Group Data Protection compliance including policy review 

Reviewed and agreed the structure and annual plan for compliance function 

Effectiveness of procedures for detecting fraud

Update on Modern Slavery matters

Consideration of UK Corporate Governance Code 2018 and disclosure regulations

Year-end final review of related party transactions

Accounting policies and disclosures in relation to:

– IFRS 16

– Corporation tax and VAT

– Supplier rebates

– Stock and related provisions

– Impairment assessment for loss making stores

Going concern and viability issues and disclosures, including the impact of COVID-19

September
2019 

March
2020

July
2020

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

59

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

X

 – Warranty risk 

The Committee has continued to discuss 
the risk to warranty sales, following the FCA’s 
proposal to enforce statistical reporting 
of this type of insurance product, and also 
the risk that the product may become 
regulated by changes to future legislation. 
The Board remains focused on monitoring 
developments in this area.

 – COVID-19  

The Committee discussed with 
management the uncertainties and impact 
of the coronavirus and considered various 
sensitivity scenarios and cash flow models 
to satisfy itself that the Group was as well 
positioned as it could be.

Accounting matters
The significant accounting and related  
matters considered by the Committee  
during the year were:
 – Implementation of new  
accounting standards 
IFRS 16 ‘Leases’ has had a material impact on 
the financial statements and the Committee 
has continued to monitor and review the 
disclosures in relation to IFRS 16.

 – Impairment  

The Committee discussed with 
management the work performed in their 
calculation of the future cash flow models 
of poor-performing stores, which had been 
used to determine whether any impairment 
had been suffered over the carrying values 
of both the right-of-use asset and the 
assets held at these stores. The Committee 
discussed with management and the 
external auditors the validity of cash flow 
projections and the significant financial 
assumptions used, including the selection  
of appropriate discount and growth rates 
used over the remaining lease period.  
The Committee satisfied itself that asset 
values were not materially misstated.

Risk management and internal control
The Board has overall responsibility for 
ensuring that the Group maintains a sound 
system of internal control. There are inherent 
limitations in any system of internal control and 
no system can provide absolute assurance 
against material misstatements, loss or failure. 
Equally, no system can guarantee elimination 
of the risk of failure to meet the objectives of 
the business. Against that background, the 
Committee has helped the Board develop and 
maintain an approach to risk management which 
incorporates risk appetite, the framework within 
which risk is managed and the responsibilities 
and procedures pertaining to the application  
of the policy.

The Group is proactive in ensuring that 
corporate and operational risks are identified 
and managed. A corporate risk register  
is maintained which details:

1.  The risks and the impact they may have;
2.  Actions to mitigate risks;
3.  Risk scores to highlight the implications  

of occurrence;

4.  Ownership of risks; and
5.  Target dates for actions to mitigate risks.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTS60

Audit Committee Report continued

A description of the principal risks is set out on 
pages 36 to 48.

systems, business continuity and cyber-risk

 – Processes and controls over products 

The Board has confirmed that it has carried out 
a robust assessment of the principal risks facing 
the Group, including those which threaten its 
business model, future performance, solvency 
or liquidity.

The Board considers that the processes 
undertaken by the Committee are appropriately 
robust and effective and in compliance with the 
guidelines issued by the Financial Reporting 
Council (FRC). During the year, the Board  
has not been advised by the Committee  
nor has it identified itself, any failings, frauds,  
or weaknesses in internal control which it  
has determined to be material in the context  
of the financial statements.

The Committee continues to believe that 
appropriate controls are in place throughout 
the Group, that the Group has a well-defined 
organisational structure with clear lines of 
responsibility and a comprehensive financial 
reporting system. The Committee also believes 
that the Company complies with the FRC 
guidance on risk management, internal control 
and related financial business reporting.

Board reporting
The Committee provides an update of matters 
discussed to the Board and the minutes of  
Audit Committee meetings are circulated to  
the Board.

Internal Audit
The Head of Audit, Risk & Compliance has  
a direct reporting line to the Committee and 
attends every Committee meeting to present 
internal audit and risk management reports. 
During the financial year, Internal Audit has 
undertaken a programme of work which was 
discussed and agreed with both management 
and the Committee and which was designed 
to address both risk management and areas 
of potential financial loss. Whilst this plan was 
revised during the year due to the period of 
lockdown, which prevented certain elements of 
work to be performed, the Committee agreed 
the changes and is comfortable that all key areas 
of risk have been covered. Internal Audit has also 
established procedures within the business to 
ensure that new risks are identified, evaluated 
and managed and that necessary changes are 
made to the risk register.

During the year, the Committee reviewed 
reports from Internal Audit in relation to:
 – Fraud risk and related internal controls 
 – Anti-money laundering 
 – Anti-bribery and corporate crime
 – Compliance with the Modern Slavery Act
 – Compliance with data protection 
 – Compliance assessments of the Group’s 
operating processes in relation to retail 
outlets and distribution centres
 – Risk management, including the 

returned to manufacturer

 – Retail store operating processes
 – Third parties and outsourced contracts
 – Product and pricing data integrity
 – Estates management
 – Deliveries and central arranging processes 
 – Order and sales processes for  

online commerce

 – Information technology processes
 – Health and safety including response to 

COVID-19 

 – Finance house payment processes 
 – Fleet processes
 – Information security in relation to  
recording of telephone calls and  
ecommerce data protection

In relation to each of the above, internal audit 
made recommendations for improvement, 
the vast majority of which were agreed by 
management and either have been or are  
being implemented.

The Committee has evaluated the performance 
of Internal Audit during the year and concluded 
that significant progress has again been made. 
Internal Audit is viewed as a function which 
has a strategic plan developed in collaboration 
with the Committee, and which provides 
constructive challenge and demonstrates  
a realistic and commercial view of the business.

External auditors
Following a tender process outlined in the 2019 
Annual Report, the Committee recommended 
that PwC be asked to continue as the Group’s 
auditors. The new partner responsible for the 
Group’s audit is Andy Ward, who is a partner in 
PwC’s Leeds office. PwC have now been the 
Group’s auditors for 10 years. The Group has 
complied with the Statutory Audit Services 
for Large Companies Market Investigation 
(Mandatory use of Competitive Tender  
Process and Audit Committee Responsibilities) 
Order 2014.

The Committee reviews the performance of 
PwC annually based on their understanding 
of key areas of judgement and the extent of 
challenge, the quality of reporting and the 
conduct, efficiency and timeliness of the 
audit. Feedback is sought from the Board, 
management and the Group’s Finance and 
Internal Audit functions.

The Committee has, in conjunction with the 
Board and the management team, reviewed the 
effectiveness of the external auditors, in relation 
to both audit and non-audit services and has 
satisfied itself that the work undertaken by the 
external auditors was effective. The Committee 
has also considered the degree of scepticism 
applied by PwC in executing their audit, 
particularly in areas requiring management 
judgement and estimation.

effectiveness of mitigating actions in relation 
to the Group’s principal risks, including IT 

The ScS 2019 audit was not chosen for 
review by the FRC. However, the Committee 

reviewed PwC’s transparency report for the 
year ended 30 June 2019, which was published 
in September 2019. That report summarises 
the results of the audit quality reviews of PwC 
conducted by the FRC and sets out the steps 
PwC is taking to ensure audit quality with 
reference to the Audit Quality Framework issues 
by the FRC. 35% of the FTSE350 audits reviewed 
required more than limited improvements 
and PwC is working hard to address the issues 
identified by the FRC and to ensure that the 
quality of their audits continue to improve.  
The Committee will monitor the progress  
PwC is making in this regard.

The Committee has established policies in 
relation to the provision of non-audit services 
by the auditors. The external auditors are not 
permitted to perform any work that they may 
be later required to audit or which might affect 
their objectivity and independence or create a 
conflict of interest. Furthermore, the external 
auditors may not perform any work prohibited  
by the Ethical Standards published by the 
Financial Reporting Council. 

All fees for non-audit work require pre-
authorisation by the Chief Financial Officer and 
the Audit Committee, and non-audit fees paid to 
the auditors are not permitted to exceed 70% of 
audit fees over a three-year period. PwC did not 
perform any non-audit services during financial 
year 2020 for the Group.

The Committee reviewed the reports prepared 
by PwC on key audit findings and any significant 
deficiencies in the control environment,  
as well as the recommendations made by PwC 
to improve processes and controls, together 
with management’s responses to those 
recommendations. PwC did not highlight 
any significant internal control weaknesses 
and management has committed to making 
appropriate changes in controls in other areas 
highlighted by PwC.

Going concern and viability
In assessing the Group’s continued adoption 
of the going concern basis of preparation of 
the financial statements, the Directors have 
carefully considered the impact of COVID-19 
on the Group’s financial position, liquidity and 
future performance. In forecasting cash flows 
over 12 months from the date of signing of the 
financial statements, the Directors have made 
assumptions in relation to customer demand, 
the availability of product and the long-term 
impact of the COVID-19 outbreak as described 
in the Financial Review.

A pandemic of this scale lacks precedence in 
the UK and it is, therefore, difficult to assess 
the medium to long-term effect it will have 
on consumer behaviour. In considering going 
concern and viability at the 2020 half-year 
end management considered a severe but 
plausible downside sensitivity scenario. Whilst 
this scenario did not include the most severe of 
possibilities it did include a two-month national 
lockdown with reduced sales post-lockdown in 

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020 
the second half of the 2020 financial year with 
sales not expected to return to normal levels 
within the year. In the period post-half-year end, 
sales remained at materially elevated levels 
and in-store sales have outperformed those 
included within the COVID-19 adjusted forecast. 

In considering going concern and viability  
at the 2020 year end, management has again 
considered a severe but plausible down side 
scenario. Whilst this scenario again does not 
include the most severe of possibilities, it again 
reflects a two-month national lockdown in the 
first half of the 2021 financial year, followed  
by a period gradual recovery, only returning  
to normal levels by July 2021. 

After making enquiries, the Directors are 
satisfied that the Group has adequate  
resources to continue in operational existence 
for the foreseeable future. Accordingly, they 
continue to adopt the going concern basis in 
preparing the financial statements (see basis  
of preparation on page 89). The Board’s Viability 
Statement is set out on page 49.

Fair, balanced and understandable
The Committee considered whether the 
2020 Annual Report is fair, balance and 
understandable and whether it provides the 
necessary information to shareholders to 
assess the Group’s performance, business 
model and strategy. Also considered was 
management’s assessment of items 
included in the financial statements and the 
prominence given to them. The Committee 
and subsequently the Board were satisfied that, 
taken as a whole, the 2020 Annual Report and 
Accounts are fair, balance and understandable. 

Ron McMillan
Chair of the Audit Committee
1 October 2020

61

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSDear Shareholder
Our Annual Remuneration Report outlines how 
the Remuneration Policy, approved at the 2018 
Annual General Meeting, was applied for 2020. 
The Remuneration Report will be subject  
to an advisory vote at our 2020 Annual  
General Meeting. 

Notwithstanding the impact of COVID-19 on the 
business, the Company remains focused on its 
three-year strategy and the Committee believes 
the current remuneration arrangements 
remain appropriate to successfully deliver 
this. The Board considers that maintaining the 
highest standards of corporate governance are 
essential to protecting shareholder value and 
that the alignment of remuneration with the 
forward looking business strategy is an integral 
part of this process. Our three-year policy 
continues to provide an appropriate framework 
and as such no changes are being proposed 
this year. The current policy is set out for 
shareholders’ information starting on page 69 
and the key principles are summarised below.

George Adams
Chair of the Remuneration Committee
1 October 2020

Directors’ Remuneration Report

62

 “On behalf of the Board, I 

am pleased to present the 
Directors’ Remuneration 
Report for the year ended 
25 July 2020.”

George Adams
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020Member and meetings attended in 2020

Member since

Meetings attended

George Adams (Chairman)

Alan Smith

Ron McMillan

Angela Luger

2015

2014

2014

2019

5

5

5

5

Remuneration principles
The key aims of the Remuneration Policy are to:
 – Attract, retain and motivate high-calibre senior management;
 – Focus senior management on the delivery of the Group’s business objectives;
 – Promote a strong and sustainable performance culture;
 – Incentivise profitable growth; and 
 – Align the interests of the Executive Directors and senior management with those of the shareholders. 

In promoting these objectives, the Committee’s aims are to implement the Remuneration Policy in a simple, transparent and understandable way, 
supporting the principles set out in Provision 40 of the 2018 UK Corporate Governance Code (‘the Code’):

Clarity

 – The Remuneration Policy is closely aligned to the business, purpose and strategy and has a clear link between 

Simplicity

Risk

performance and reward. 

 – The Policy has operated largely unchanged since IPO. 

 – Performance targets are set to ensure the delivery of sustainable profitable growth and appropriate safeguards are in 

place to ensure that overall outcomes are aligned with underlying business performance and the stakeholder experience. 

Predictability

 – Maximum limits for variable pay are set and disclosed. 

Proportionality

 – Remuneration levels are periodically benchmarked against other similar sized companies and actual rewards closely  

linked to the performance outcomes delivered. 

Alignment to culture

 – The incentive schemes are focused on our strategy of sustainable profitable growth and are designed to encourage 

behaviours that are consistent with ScS’ purpose, culture and values. 

63

Overview of performance and remuneration outcomes
The COVID-19 pandemic has had a significant impact on the business, resulting in the temporary closure of our stores and distribution network for 
several weeks. Whilst the Group’s strong balance sheet and flexible cost base, has enabled us to be resilient to the challenges facing us, there was an 
inevitable impact on profitability during the year. As such, no bonuses will be paid to Executive Directors or senior management for 2020 and the LTIP 
award that was granted in 2017 will lapse.

As part of our commitment to our employees, the Board and senior management have worked tirelessly to keep the spirit and morale of employees high, 
planning quick responses to re-opening our stores and distribution centres whilst ensuring all employees were re-trained and comfortable with altered 
working conditions. There was a strong focus on communication and keeping our entire team updated whilst our stores and distribution centres were 
closed. The focus for FY21 will be on getting the business back on track to pre-COVID performance as soon as possible.

No changes are proposed to the Executive Directors’ salaries for 2021. Our incentive schemes (annual bonus and LTIP) will continue to focus on our  
long-term strategy of profitable growth, with stretching performance targets applied. The Committee will use its discretion to ensure that any rewards 
earned are commensurate with the underlying performance of the business and the employee and stakeholder experience. 

The Committee has taken into account the Code, wider workforce remuneration and emerging best practice in relation to Executive Director 
remuneration. The Committee believes that our remuneration framework is clear and transparent and aligned with our culture; over 80% of the wider 
workforce are eligible to earn a bonus. The incentive framework consists of an annual bonus and LTIP, with capped award levels and a pay-out linked to 
group performance. Stretching but fair targets are set. This ensures that potential reward outcomes are clear and aligned to the performance achieved, 
with the Committee having the discretion to adjust outcomes where this is not considered to be the case.

Pay levels are set taking into account internal and external reference points to ensure that pay is competitive whilst remaining equitable within the Group. 
A number of additional factors are in place to mitigate reputational and other risks, including malus and clawback provisions, Committee discretion,  
a two-year holding period on LTIP awards, and minimum shareholding guidelines. 

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSDirectors’ Remuneration Report continued

Shareholder feedback
We value the views of our shareholders and we actively welcome any feedback on our Remuneration Policy and its implementation. Given the 
current uncertainties and the difficulties in setting appropriate targets for bonuses and LTIP’s on a forward looking basis; we have engaged directly in 
conversations with principal shareholders to understand fully their thoughts on forward-looking remuneration. The feedback obtained has been used  
by the Committee to set the forward looking performance criteria.

We hope you find this report helpful and informative and we hope to receive your support for our Annual Remuneration Report at our Annual General 
Meeting on 25 November 2020.

Annual Remuneration Report

Elements of remuneration 
Salary
During the year, the remuneration of the two Executive Directors of the Company, along with the senior management of the Group, was reviewed. The 
Remuneration Committee decided that, given the uncertain market conditions and in light of COVID-19, the salaries of the CEO and the CFO will remain 
unchanged from their remuneration in 2020. No basic pay increases were given to any of the senior management team. Details of the average increase 
given to other employees is detailed on page 67.

The current basic salaries as at 1 October 2020 are:
 – David Knight: £306,000
 – Chris Muir: £240,000

The CEO’s salary and the CFO’s salary benchmark broadly in line with the market median.

Pension and other benefits
The Executive Directors are eligible to pension benefits equating to 20% of their basic salary, which are non-contributory. The CEO and the CFO receive 
£10,000 and £9,960 per annum, respectively, of pension benefits into their pension fund. The balance is paid as a cash allowance. In 2019, the Committee 
agreed to freeze the current monetary value of the CEO and CFO’s pension. In the event of a future uplift to their basic salary, the pension will remain as a 
capped fixed contribution. Any new Executive Director appointments will have a pension contribution in line with that provided to the broader workforce. 

64

The CEO and the CFO receive a car allowance of £18,624 and £17,000, respectively.

The Executive Directors are also provided with private medical insurance and life assurance that provides cover of up to four times base salary. 

Annual bonus
The Executive Directors were eligible to receive annual bonuses in 2020. However, EBITDA performance in 2020 did not meet the threshold level required 
and as such no bonus was paid out. The details of the targets and how the bonus was to be calculated are set out below: 

Pre-bonus EBITDA
% maximum
David Knight
Chris Muir

£19,102,750
12.5%
£53,550
£42,000

£21,231,000
50%
£214,200
£168,000

£22,688,500
75%
£321,300
£252,000

£24,146,000
100%
£428,400
£336,000

For 2021, the maximum bonus opportunity is unchanged at 140% of base salary for both the CEO and CFO. The bonus is based on the achievement of 
stretching EBITDA targets. The Committee does not disclose the targets in advance as they are commercially sensitive. Retrospective disclosure of the 
EBITDA targets will be included in next year’s report. 

Long-term incentives
The LTIP granted on 16 October 2017, which was due to vest in 2020, will lapse in full as the loss per share for the Group was below the performance 
condition set, a minimum EPS of 25.1p. Details of the award and the performance conditions attached were set out in full in the 2017 Annual Report.

During the year, the Executive Directors were granted a Long-Term Incentive Plan award with a face value of 150% of salary each. The awards were made 
in the form of nil-cost options and were for 195,319 and 153,191 shares respectively for the CEO and CFO. The awards have a three-year vesting period, 
plus a two-year hold period. The average share price on the date of grant, 14 October 2019 was 236.0p. As disclosed in last year’s Annual Report,  
the following EPS targets were applied:

EPS figure (in 2022)

Less than 31.6p
31.6p
Greater than 31.6p but less than 38.7p
38.7p

Percentage of award that vests

Nil
25%
Straight-line basis between 25% and 100%
100%

It is noted that with the implementation of IFRS 16, changes will impact on EPS performance for these awards at the point of vesting. The impact is that 
future cash flows relating to property and vehicle leases will be capitalised and shown on the balance sheet. Rental charges will no longer exist, the charge 
being replaced by depreciation and finance costs over the lease term. The Committee therefore intends to adjust the EPS targets for the 2018, 2019 and 
2020 LTIP awards when the impact of IFRS 16 has crystallised. Whilst we have all the data we require with regards to property and vehicle leases, the final 
impact of IFRS 16 will not be known until we reach the relevant year. The adjustment is intended purely to reflect the changes created as a result of IFRS 16 
and are not an amendment to the agreed targets per se. The Committee has engaged directly with a number of shareholders to discuss the current and 
future LTIP arrangements. No changes are intended for in-flight awards. 

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020 
 
A wider than normal target band has been applied to reflect both the current uncertainty and to provide a stretching level at the upper limit.

The Committee has agreed to award a Long-Term Incentive Plan in 2021. The CEO and CFO will be awarded nil cost options subject to EPS targets  
being met. The awards have a three-year vesting period, plus a two-year holding period, and are subject to the following targets:

EPS figure (in 2023) 

Less than 18.3p
18.3p
Greater than 18.3p but less than 31.0p
31.0p

Percentage of award that vests

Nil
25%
Straight-line basis between 25% and 100%
100%

The Committee considers that the targets are stretching and will ensure that significant reward is only available for delivery of a strong performance. 

While the share price has trended lower recently due to external factors, the Remuneration Committee determined that the 2020 grants would be 
maintained at the normal levels (150% of base salary for the Executive Directors). However, the Committee has full discretion, under the plan rules,  
to ensure that the final vesting outcomes are justified based on the performance of the Group, including consideration of any windfall gains.

All-employee share plans
The Company offers an all-employee UK Share Incentive Plan (SIP). All employees on completion of six months service become eligible to join. Under the SIP 
employees may elect to acquire up to £150 worth of shares in the Company every month or pay a maximum one-off lump sum of up to £1,800 in a tax year. 

The Executive Directors are eligible to participate in the SIP on the same basis as other employees.

Single figure table of total remuneration Executive Directors – audited
The audited table below shows the aggregate remuneration of the Directors of the Group during 2020 and 2019:

Salary 
£

Benefits**
£

Bonus
£

LTIP***
£

Pension*
£

Total
£

Total fixed 
remuneration
£

Total variable 
remuneration
£

David Knight

2019

2020

Chris Muir

2019

2020

306,000

306,000

240,000

240,000

20,798

20,827

18,605

19,035

425,187

281,787

–

–

238,200

222,848

–

–

61,200

61,200

48,000

48,000

1,094,972

388,027

767,653

307,035

387,998

388,027

306,605

307,035

706,974

–

461,048

–

65

*  David Knight and Chris Muir opt to receive part of their pension contributions as a cash allowance.
**  Benefits of the Directors are discussed in detail on page 69. 
*** The value of the LTIP award vesting in 2019 has been updated to reflect the actual share price on the date of vesting.

Payments to past Directors and loss of office payments – audited
There were no payments to past directors for loss of office in the year ended 25 July 2020 (2019: none).

Remuneration of the Chairman and Non-Executive Directors – audited
The structure of Non-Executive Directors fees, and their levels, were set by the Board on admission. No review is expected during 2021. 

The fees of the Non-Executive Directors are set by the Board and take account of the chairmanship of Board Committees and the time and responsibility 
of the roles of each Director. 

The fees paid for 2020 to the Non-Executive Directors were as follows:

Alan Smith
Ron McMillan
George Adams
Angela Luger (appointed 16 May 2019)

2020
£ 

125,000
60,000
60,000
50,000

2019
£

125,000
60,000
60,000
10,642

Our Non-Executive Directors (excluding the Chairman) have a base salary of £50,000. Ron McMillan and George Adams each receive an additional 
£10,000 per annum for chairing the Audit and Remuneration Committees respectively.

Paul Daccus (resigned 11 February 2020) did not receive any remuneration for his services to the Group. There were no other amounts disclosable  
for the Non-Executive Directors for the year. 

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSDirectors’ Remuneration Report continued

Directors’ shareholding and share interests – audited
The table below sets out the number of shares held or potentially held by Directors (including connected persons or related parties where relevant)  
as at the financial year end 2020. 

Director

Alan Smith 
Ron McMillan
George Adams
Angela Luger

David Knight 
Number 

Value at year end

Chris Muir
Number 

Value at year end

Shares held 
beneficially

18,096
–
2,000
–

Unvested 

–
–
–
–

Share interests 
held beneficially

Nil cost options 
subject to 
performance*

Option awards  
vested 

Total

1,528,615

£2,330,679

50,474

£76,958

401,519

£612,196

314,917

£480,154

22,772**

1,952,906

£34,720

£2,977,595

-

-

365,391

£557,112

*  Awards vest subject to EPS performance over a three-year period. This relates to awards granted in 2019 and 2020.
**  Option awards vested (but unexercised) are 22,772 options at an exercise price of 175p.

The value of share interests at the year end is based on the average share price in the three months ending on 25 July 2020 of 152.47p.

The Executive Directors are required to build and maintain a shareholding equivalent to 200% of base salary. The shareholding for David Knight was 
significantly in excess of this level at the year end. The beneficial shareholding for Chris Muir is currently 50,474, but he is required to continue to build  
up a shareholding, which will be achieved by the retention of share options awarded under the LTIP.

66

Performance graph and pay table
The chart below illustrates the Group’s Total Shareholder Return (TSR) performance against the performance of the FTSE Fledgling Index, from the date 
of the IPO of the Group. This index was selected as it represents a broad equity market index which includes companies of a comparable size. 

200

180

160

140

120

100

80

ScS

FTSE Fledgling Index

)
d
e
s
a
b
e
R

(
n
r
u
t
e
r
r
e
d
o
h
e
r
a
h
s

l

l

a
t
o

60T

27 Jan 2015

27 A pr 2015

27Jul 2015

27 O ct 2015

27Jan 2016

27 A pr 2016

27Jul 2016

27 O ct 2016

27Jan 2017

27 A pr 2017

27Jul 2017

27 O ct 2017

27Jan 2018

27 A pr 2018

27Jul 2018

27 O ct 2018

27Jan 2019

27 A pr 2019

27Jul 2019

27 O ct 2019

27Jan 2020

27 A pr 2020

31 Jul 2020

Source: Datastream (Thomson Reuters).

This graph shows the value, by 25 July 2020, of £100 invested in ScS Group on 26 January 2015 compared with the value of £100 invested in the  
FTSE Fledgling Index.

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020 
 
 
 
Changes in the remuneration of the CEO
Total remuneration of the CEO in each of the past ten years is as follows: 

David Knight

2020

2019

2018

2017

2016

2015

2014

2013

2012

2011

Salary 
£

Bonus
£

Benefits
£

306,000

306,000

306,000

306,000

300,000

300,000

300,000

247,500

247,500

247,500

–

425,187

427,372 

203,418

420,000

–

177,450

274,073

199,635

–

20,827

20,798

20,836 

20,685

21,290

20,183

20,336

16,302

13,929

17,265

LTIP
£

–

281,787

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

–

Pension
£

61,200

61,200

61,200

61,200

60,000

60,000

60,000

49,500

71,625

49,500

Total
£

388,027

1,094,972

815,408 

591,303

801,290

380,183

557,786

587,375

532,689

314,265

Changes in the remuneration of the Directors
The table below shows the percentage changes in the Executive and Non-Executive Directors’ remuneration between the financial year ended 25 July 
2020 and the year ended 27 July 2019 compared to the amounts for full-time employees of the Group for each of the following elements of pay: 

Executive Directors
David Knight
Chris Muir

Non-Executive Directors
Alan Smith
Ron McMillan
George Adams
Angela Luger

Percentage change from 2019

Salary

Benefits

Bonus

-
-

-
-
-
-

0.1%
2.3%

n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a

(100)%
(100)%

67

n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a

Average per employee (excluding Directors)

1.2%

7.3%

(56.3%)

Relative importance of the spend on pay
The table below shows the movement in spend on pay for all employees compared with the distributions to shareholders.

Total pay for employees
Distributions to shareholders

2020
£’000

52,230
4,336

2019
£’000

60,308 
6,547

% Change

(13.4%) 
(33.8%) 

CEO pay ratio
The table below shows the ratio of CEO pay for 2020 comparing the sum of the single total figures of remuneration for David Knight to the full-time 
equivalent total reward of those colleagues whose pay is ranked at the 25th, 50th and 75th percentile in our UK workforce. 

We have adopted Methodology Option A to calculate the ratio, as we believe it provides the best comparison of colleague pay with that of our CEO by 
using a consistent methodology to value remuneration and identify our employees ranked at the 25th, 50th and 75th percentiles. Employee pay was 
calculated based on actual pay and benefits for the 12 monthly payrolls in respect of the full financial year to 25 July 2020. We can confirm that none  
of the three individuals received additional or exceptional pay within the year and no adjustments were made to the calculation of the total remuneration 
for these employees from the methodology set out for the CEO’s single total figure remuneration. The ratios as set out below: 

Year

2020

Method

25th percentile

50th percentile

75th percentile

Option A

21:1

16:1

12:1

This is the first year that ScS Group has disclosed the pay ratio and, as such, we have no historic data against which to compare this year’s ratio.  
We will provide additional commentary on the comparison year-on-year from next year’s report. The table below provides the individual remuneration 
information in relation to our employees ranked at the 25th, 50th and 75th percentiles: 

Year

2020

Method

25th percentile

50th percentile

75th percentile

Salary

Total pay and benefits

£17,601

£18,190

£24,259

£24,259

£19,727

£31,412

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSDirectors’ Remuneration Report continued

Gender pay gap
Information on our gender pay gap can be found on scsplc.co.uk. 

Remuneration Committee
The members of the Committee for the 2020 financial year were George Adams (Committee Chairman), Alan Smith, Ron McMillan and Angela Luger.  
All of the current members are independent Non-Executive Directors. 

The responsibilities of the Committee are set out in the Corporate Governance section of the Annual Report on page 55.

The Committee may invite the Executive Directors or other members of the senior management to attend meetings and assist the Committee in 
its deliberations as appropriate. No person is present during any deliberations relating to their own remuneration or involved in determining their own 
remuneration. During the course of the year, David Knight, Chris Muir, Paul Daccus and Marie Liston, Corporate Services Director, were in attendance  
as required.

The attendance of members of the Committee at meetings was as follows:

Name

George Adams
Alan Smith
Ron McMillan
Angela Luger

Attendance

5
5
5
5

Advisors to the Committee
During the year, the Committee received independent advice on executive remuneration matters from New Bridge Street, a trading name of Aon Hewitt 
Ltd, and from July 2020, Mercer Ltd. Mercer were appointed by the Remuneration Committee following a selection process.

68

New Bridge Street and Mercer Ltd are members of the Remuneration Consultants Group and, as such, voluntarily operate under the code of conduct in 
relation to executive remuneration consulting in the UK. The Committee has received advice provided by New Bridge Street and Mercer during the year 
and is comfortable that they have been objective and independent. Total fees received by New Bridge Street in relation to remuneration advice provided 
to the Committee during 2020 amounted to £14,146, excluding VAT, based on the required time commitment. Total fees received by Mercer in relation  
to remuneration advice provided to the Committee during 2020 amounted to £9,540, excluding VAT, based on the required time commitment. 

Shareholder voting
At the Annual General Meeting on 27 November 2019, the total number of shares issued with voting rights was 38,012,655. The resolution to approve 
the Annual Remuneration Report from the 2019 AGM and the resolution to approve the Remuneration Policy from the 2018 AGM received the following 
votes from shareholders.

Resolution

Percentage 
of votes cast 

Votes for

in favour Votes against

To approve the Annual Remuneration Report (2019 AGM)

28,329,606

99.99%

4,115

To approve the Remuneration Policy (2018 AGM)

30,408,893

99.96%

13,626

Percentage 
of votes cast 
against

0.01%

0.04%

Votes 
withheld

Total votes 
cast

Percentage 
of issued 
share
capital voted 

2,368 28,336,089

74.54%

- 30,422,519

76.04%

This report has been approved by the Board of Directors of the Group and signed on behalf of the Board by:

George Adams
Chairman of the Remuneration Committee
1 October 2020

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020Remuneration Policy Report 

Remuneration Policy overview
Total remuneration packages for the Executive Directors established at the time of the IPO will provide the basis for the structure of Director remuneration 
for the Group. Variable elements of reward including performance-based annual bonuses and long-term incentives will form a significant part of the overall 
remuneration package for Executive Directors and senior management. 

How the views of shareholders are taken into account 
The Committee recognises that developing a dialogue with shareholders is constructive and informative in developing and applying the Remuneration 
Policy. The Committee monitors the feedback received from shareholders during the year and takes into account the best practice guidance issued  
by institutional shareholders and their representative bodies.

The Directors’ Remuneration Policy
The Directors’ Remuneration Policy was approved by shareholders at the 2018 AGM and took effect from that date. As part of the review process, 
feedback was sought and received from major shareholders. This report has been prepared on behalf of, and has been approved by, the Board.  
It complies with The Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) (Amendment) Regulations 2013. 

Changes from the previously approved policy
The key changes between the previous policy and this Policy were:
 – Broadening the structure of the bonus scheme to include non-financial measures.
 – The introduction of a minimum two-year holding period for LTIP awards and an increase in the maximum award that can be granted from 100%  

of basic salary to 150% of basic salary. 

 – An increase in shareholding requirements from 100% of basic salary to 200% of basic salary.
 – Further minor amendments have been made either to clarify aspects of the previous policy or to reflect consequential amendments following  

the material amendments described above.

Remuneration element

Purpose

Operation

Maximum

Base salary

Benefits

Pension

Bonus

This is the basic pay and 
reflects the individual’s 
role, responsibilities and 
contribution to the Group.

Base salaries are reviewed annually with changes 
typically taking effect from the beginning of the 
relevant financial year. On reviews, consideration is 
given by the Committee to a range of factors, including 
the Group’s overall performance, market conditions 
and individual performance of executives and the  
level of salary increases given to employees across  
the Group.

Base salaries will be benchmarked periodically against 
companies that are both main and AIM listed, who are 
of a similar size, sector and complexity.

Salaries will generally be set at the mid-market levels.

69

To provide benefits which 
are valued by the individual 
and assist them in carrying 
out their duties.

The Group will provide market competitive benefits, 
which may periodically be reviewed. Executives will 
generally be eligible to receive those benefits on similar 
terms to other senior executives.

We ensure that benefits offered are in line with  
the market.

Executives are entitled to a car allowance or a company 
car, car insurance, other running costs and fuel, death 
in service life assurance, private medical care and 
any other Group-wide benefits including employee 
discount. Business travel and associated hospitality  
are provided in the normal course of business.

The Committee has the discretion to add or remove 
benefits to remain market competitive or to meet 
the needs of the business. In addition, where the 
Committee considers it appropriate to do so, 
additional relocation expenses may be paid.

To provide a market 
competitive pension 
contribution (or equivalent 
cash allowance).

Executive Directors may take pension benefits as a 
contribution to defined contribution personal pension 
plans, or on reaching the lifetime limit for pension 
contributions the Executive Director can receive  
cash in lieu.

Provide an incentive 
linked to the financial 
performance of the  
Group and any other 
appropriate individual  
or business measures.

The Committee intends for the majority of the 
bonus to be based on financial measures, but has 
the discretion to introduce operational, corporate, 
divisional and/or individual performance measures  
if appropriate to the business.

Performance conditions, once set, will generally 
remain unaltered, but the Committee has the right in 
its absolute discretion to make adjustments during any 
performance period to reflect any events arising which 
were unforeseen when the performance conditions 
were originally set by the Committee. Bonuses are 
normally paid in cash.

A total maximum value of 20% of base salary for 
existing Executive Directors.

Since the policy was introduced, the Committee have 
agreed to cap the pension contributions for existing 
Directors at their current pound value and committed 
to align the pension arrangement for future hires with 
the workforce rate.

The current annual bonus potential for the CEO and 
CFO is 140% of base salary. The threshold bonus levels 
will be no more than 25% of their respective maxima. 
As the regulations require a formal cap for a three-year 
period, future bonus potential will only increase where 
appropriate against market data and, in any event,  
will be subject to an overall maximum of 200% of salary 
for any Executive Director.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSRemuneration Policy Report continued

Remuneration element

Purpose

Operation

Maximum

Long-term incentives 

To align the Directors 
with the long-term 
performance of the 
business and the returns 
received by shareholders.

Awards may be made annually as options (including  
nil cost options) or as conditional share awards  
based on performance conditions. The Committee 
may set performance conditions typically over  
a three-year period.

The policy is to award Executive Directors nil cost  
share options equating to no more than 150%  
of their basic salary in respect of each financial year.

No more than 25% of an award can be earned for  
a threshold performance.

A two-year post-vesting holding period will be applied 
to awards from 2019 onwards.

Performance is normally based on earnings per share 
targets, but different measures and targets may be 
used alongside or instead of earnings per share for 
future awards at the discretion of the Committee.

Performance conditions, once set, will generally 
remain unaltered, but the Committee has the right 
in its absolute discretion to substitute, vary or waive 
the performance conditions during any performance 
period in case of events arising which were unforeseen 
when the performance conditions were first set by the 
Committee, provided that such substitution, variation 
or waiver is reasonable and (other than in the case of  
a waiver) produces a fairer measure of performance 
and is not materially less difficult to satisfy.

Dividend equivalents will be made as either a cash 
payment or delivery of plan shares in an amount equal 
in value to the dividends that would have been payable 
on the number of vested plan shares under the award 
in respect of the period between the award date and 
the date on which the award vested or, where the award 
is an option and a holding period applies, to the date of 
expiry of the holding period or exercise (if earlier).

A two-year post-vesting holding period shall apply to 
LTIP awards granted to Executive Directors and may 
apply (at the discretion of the Committee) in relation to 
LTIP awards granted to others.

70

Shareholding guidelines

Employee share plan

Executive Directors are 
expected to maintain their 
minimum shareholding 
levels once they have  
been obtained. 

The Committee will review shareholding annually 
against policy. The Committee reserves the right  
to alter the shareholding guidelines during the period 
of the policy but without making the guidelines any  
less onerous overall. 

The minimum required level of shareholding is 200%  
of base salary of the relevant Executive.

Executive Directors can participate in the employee 
Share Incentive Plan (SIP) on the same terms as other 
employees of the Group in the UK.

To encourage share 
ownership by employees 
and participation in the 
long-term success of 
the Group, the Group 
operates an employee 
share incentive plan for 
UK employees which was 
adopted in April 2015. 

Under the rules of the SIP employees can purchase 
shares from their pre-tax and pre-national insurance 
salary through a resident SIP trust. Although the Group 
has no current intention to do so, the Group may also 
award matching shares (in proportion to the number  
of shares an employee chooses to purchase), or to 
make an award of free shares.

The maximum amount that can be purchased, offered 
as a match or awarded for free under the SIP is subject 
to the published HMRC annual limits.

Payment of statutory entitlements and settlement of claims
The Group may pay any statutory entitlements to which an Executive Director is entitled, or settle or compromise any claims made in connection with 
the termination of employment of the Executive Director where the Committee considers such claims to have a reasonable prospect of success that  
it is in the best interests of the Group to do so.

Remuneration Policy and other employees
As well as the Executive Directors, other senior management will also participate in the performance-based annual incentive plan to be adopted under 
the Remuneration Policy above. A small group of senior management also participates in the Long-Term Incentive Plan for performance share awards. 

The Group is committed to widespread share ownership. The Group employee Share Incentive Plan (SIP), which was adopted prior to admission,  
has been launched. Under the SIP, Executive Directors are eligible to participate on a basis consistent with all other employees. 

In setting the Remuneration Policy going forward, the Committee will also have regard to pay structures across the broader Group. The Committee  
takes into account the general base salary increase for the broader workforce when undertaking annual salary reviews for the Executive Directors,  
and will consider consultation with the wider workforce should it be felt appropriate to do so.

Operation of variable pay
Annual incentive plan
The Committee will set the performance targets annually under the annual incentive plan to take account of the Group’s strategic plan and financial 
performance. The performance targets are set by the Committee based on a range of factors including against the budget for the financial year.  
The metrics adopted by the Committee and the weighting of them may vary in relation to the Group’s strategy each year. 

The Committee sets a threshold on-target and maximum pay-out target under the plan.

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020Long-Term Incentive Plan (LTIP)
The Committee will regularly review the performance targets in relation to the LTIP to take account of the Group’s strategic plan and financial 
performance. Targets will be set by the Committee at the time of the grant of each award. 

The Committee will operate the scheme in accordance with the plan rules which were approved by shareholders in January 2015. Under the plan rules  
the Committee has authority to vary the terms of an existing award in certain circumstances. This includes the ability to:
 – Settle awards in cash in extremis;
 – Make adjustments to the number of shares under option, in the event of a change in the share capital of the Group; and
 – Permit the early vesting of awards in the event of a change in control of the Group or, if appropriate to do so, on cessation of employment (see policy 

on service contracts and payments for loss of office). 

Clawback
The annual incentive plan and the LTIP rules include provisions for malus and clawback within a three-year period following payment or vesting if the 
Committee concludes that there has been a material misstatement of financial results; an error has been made in assessing any performance targets; 
conduct of the individual which amounts to fraud or gross misconduct; events or behaviour of the individual leading to censure of the Group by  
a regulatory authority which has an impact on the reputation of the Group which justifies clawback being operated; or where the Committee discovers 
information from which it concludes that a bonus or award was paid or vested to a greater extent than it should have been. Malus and clawback provisions 
have applied to awards made since January 2015.

Potential reward scenarios
The graphs below show an estimate of the Executive Directors’ remuneration package as it will be implemented for 2020. 

Assumptions
 – The minimum scenario reflects fixed remuneration only which is base salary, pension and benefits. 
 – The on-target scenario reflects the fixed remuneration plus 50% of the maximum annual bonus under the annual incentive plan, and 25% vesting 

under the LTIP being the threshold level (assuming an award of 150% of salary to Executive Directors under the LTIP).

 – The maximum scenario reflects fixed remuneration plus 100% of the maximum annual bonus under the annual incentive plan which is 140% of base 

salary and 150% vesting under the LTIP (assuming an award of 150% of salary under the LTIP). 

 – The maximum plus scenario is the same above but shows the impact of a 50% increase in the share price on the value of the LTIP award (the on-target 

and maximum scenarios exclude the impact of share price increase). 

71

David Knight (Chief Executive Officer)

Chris Muir (Chief Financial Officer)

£’000

1,500

1,200

900

600

300

0

1,504,927
46%

1,275,427
36%

28%

34%

716,977
16%
30%

26%

30%

54%

388,027
100%

Maximum 
Plus

Maximum On-target Minimum

Base

Bonus

LTIP

£’000

1,200

900

600

300

0

1,183,035
46%

1,003,035
36%

28%

33%

565,035
16%
30%

26%

31%

54%

307,035
100%

Maximum 
Plus

Maximum On-target Minimum

Discretions retained by the Committee in operating variable pay schemes
The Committee operates the Group’s various incentive plans according to their respective rules and (in the case of the Share Incentive Plan) in 
accordance with relevant legislation and HMRC guidance. In order to ensure efficient administration of these plans, certain operational discretions  
are reserved to the Committee. These include:
 – Determining who may participate in the plans;
 – Determining the timing of grants of awards and/or payments under the plans;
 – Determining the quantum of any awards and/or payments (within the limits set out in the policy table above);
 – In exceptional circumstances, determining that a share-based award shall be settled (in full or in part) in cash;
 – Determining the performance measures and targets applicable to an award (in accordance with the statements made in the policy table above);
 – Where a participant ceases to be employed by the Group or relocates abroad, determining whether ‘good leaver’ status shall apply;
 – Determining the extent of vesting of an award based on assessment of the performance conditions, including discretion as to the basis on which 

performance is to be measured if an award vests in advance of normal timetable (on cessation of employment as a ‘good leaver’ or on the occurrence 
of corporate events);

 – Whether, and to what extent, pro ration shall apply in the event of cessation of employment as a ‘good leaver’ or on the occurrence of corporate events;
 – Whether malus and/or clawback shall be applied to any award and, if so, the extent to which they shall apply; and
 – Making appropriate adjustments to awards on account of certain events, such as major changes in the Group’s capital structure.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSRemuneration Policy Report continued

Recruitment and promotions
The remuneration package for a new Executive Director would be set in accordance with the terms of the Group’s Remuneration Policy at the time  
of the appointment. 

Additionally, on appointment of any new Executive Director (whether by external recruitment or internal promotion) the Remuneration Policy will permit 
the following:
 – The UK regulations do not require that caps on fixed pay apply to a new recruit and the Committee reserves the right to set fixed pay at such levels  
as it considers necessary although, in practice, it envisages abiding by the caps set out in this Policy. Variable pay will be capped at the limits set out  
in the Policy for existing Directors. 

 – If a new Executive Director’s salary is set on appointment below the median market rates, phased increases (as a percentage of salary) above those 

granted generally to other employees may be awarded subject to the individual’s performance and development. 

 – On pensions, the intention is to limit the pension provision (provided either through a Company contribution to a defined contribution scheme 

or paid as a cash allowance in lieu of pension) to the same level as the wider workforce for all new Executive Directors and members of the senior 
management team. However, the Committee reserves the discretion to provide a pension provision in excess of this and up to a maximum of 20%  
of salary if necessary to do so in a recruitment situation. 

 – The Group may compensate a new Executive Director for amounts forgone from the individual’s former employer in addition to ongoing 

remuneration provided under the Policy (as permitted under Listing Rules) taking account of the amount forfeited, the extent of any performance 
conditions, the nature of the award and the time period for vesting. 

 – The annual incentive plan would operate in accordance with its terms pro-rated for the period of employment, and depending on the appointment 

timing, different performance targets might be set as the Committee considers appropriate.

 – On an internal appointment, any variable pay element awarded in respect of the individual’s former role would be allowed to pay out according 

to its terms, with any relevant adjustment to take account of the appointment. Any other ongoing remuneration obligations existing prior to the 
appointment would also continue. 

 – On any appointment, the Committee may agree that the Group will meet the appropriate relocation expenses. 

Service contract and payments for loss of office
Main provisions on termination
The service contract for the CEO and CFO is indefinite but terminable either by the Company or the Executive Director on 12 months’ notice.  
The service contract for the CEO is dated 19 December 2014 and for the CFO 8 January 2016.

72

An Executive Directors’ service contract can also be terminated without notice or payment of compensation except for pay accrued up to the 
termination date on the occurrence of certain events such as gross misconduct. 

Payment in lieu of notice equal to the base salary only for the unexpired period of notice can be paid under the Executive Directors’ service agreements.

Ordinarily, an Executive Director shall not be entitled to receive any benefits or allowances following their cessation of employment. However, the 
Committee may in exceptional circumstances allow an Executive Director to continue to receive appropriate benefits or allowances (such as reasonable 
outplacement or legal fees) for a limited period following cessation. 

There are no enhanced provisions on a change of control under the Executive Directors’ service contracts. Should a change of control event occur then 
awards under the bonus and long-term incentive plans shall become payable as soon as practicable after the event date. The awards will be pro-rated to 
reflect the extent to which the relevant performance targets have been met at the date of the relevant event, and on a time-apportioned basis although 
the Committee has discretion to disapply time-apportionment if it considers it appropriate to do so.

Any new contracts will be on similar terms.

The service contracts of the Executive Directors are available for inspection at the registered office of the Company. 

Annual bonus on termination
There is no contractual entitlement to annual bonus on termination or if an Executive Director is under notice. Under the annual incentive plan,  
the Committee has absolute discretion to permit a bonus to be paid to a leaver or under notice based on the full or part-year performance, subject  
to consideration by the Committee of the reasons for the individual leaving. A full or pro-rata time-based bonus may be awarded, and this may be paid 
either at or before the normal payment date. 

Performance share plans on termination
Share-based awards made under the Group’s share plans are governed by the relevant plan rules. Under the rules of the LTIP, unvested awards shall 
ordinarily lapse on the individual giving or being given notice of termination of employment, except in certain prescribed ‘good leaver’ scenarios or unless 
the Committee in its discretion permits an award to vest on such terms as it may specify in its absolute discretion. 

In determining the extent of any vesting, the Committee will take into account the achievement of any applicable performance targets. A pro-rata 
reduction would normally be applied on a time-apportioned basis, although the Committee has discretion to disapply this requirement if it considers  
it appropriate to do so. Early vesting of outstanding awards may be permitted at the discretion of the Committee.

Awards which may have vested before giving or receiving notice of termination of employment remain exercisable for a period of six months after leaving 
or (if later) the expiry of any holding period which the award was subject to. The Committee has the discretion to extend this period. 

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020Chairman and Non-Executive Directors
Fees
The level and structure of fees for the Non-Executive Directors was set by the Board from admission. The fees of the Non-Executive Directors are set  
by the Board taking account of the chairmanship of Board Committees and the time and responsibility of the roles of each of them. The fees are paid in 
cash. The Committee has responsibility for determining fees paid to the Chairman of the Board. All fees are subject to the aggregate fee cap for Directors 
in the Articles of Association, which is currently £400,000 per annum. 

Details of the fees paid to the Non-Executive Directors are set out in the Remuneration Report. The Chairman and the Non-Executive Directors are 
entitled to be reimbursed for all expenses reasonably incurred by them in the performance of their duties. The Chairman and Non-Executive Directors  
do not participate in any bonus or share plans of the Company.

The Non-Executive Directors do not have service contracts. They are appointed for an initial three-year period subject to being re-elected by members 
annually.

Remuneration element

Purpose

Operation

Maximum

Non-Executive Directors’ fees

Helps recruit and retain high quality, 
experienced individuals. 

Reflects time commitment and role.

The aggregate amount of Directors’ 
fees is limited by the Group’s Articles 
of Association.

The level and structure of fees  
was set by the Board at admission. 
The fees consist of an annual basic 
fee plus additional fees paid for the 
chairmanship of Board Committees. 
Limited benefits relating to travel  
and accommodation may be provided 
in relation to the performance of any 
Director’s duties.

Non-Executive Directors’ fees are 
set by the Executive Directors with 
reference to external data on fee 
levels in similar businesses, having 
taken account of the responsibilities 
of individual Directors and their 
expected annual time commitment.

73

Letters of appointment
Alan Smith and Ron McMillan have letters of appointment dated 22 October 2014 for an initial period of three years and are subject to three months’ 
notice of termination by either side at any time and subject to annual re-appointment as a Director by the shareholders. George Adams’ letter of 
appointment is dated 9 July 2015, and Angela Luger’s letter of appointment is dated 16 May 2019. Alan Smith and Ron McMillan were re-appointed  
for a further term of three years commencing 22 October 2020. George Adams was re-appointed for a further term of three years commencing  
9 July 2018. The appointment letters provide that no other compensation is payable on termination. 

Insurance
All of the members of the Board have the benefit of Directors and Officers Liability Insurance which gives them cover for legal action which may arise 
against them personally.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSDirectors’ Report

Activities and results
The Directors present their Annual Report, together with the audited consolidated financial statements for the year ended 25 July 2020. ScS is one  
of the UK’s leading furniture and flooring retailers, operating from 100 ScS stores principally located in modern retail park locations across the country.

Management Report
The Directors’ Report, together with the Strategic Report, set out on pages 1 to 49, form part of the Management Report for the purposes of Disclosure 
Guidance and Transparency Rule (DTR) 4.1.5R.

Statutory information contained elsewhere in the Annual Report 
Other information that is relevant to the Directors’ Report, and which is incorporated by reference into this report, can be located as follows:

Information

Future developments

Stakeholder engagement

Corporate governance report

Section 172 statement

Risk management

Statement of responsibilities 

Pages

24 to 25

33

52 to 56

32

34 to 48

77

As permitted by legislation, the Group has chosen to include certain matters in its Strategic Report that would otherwise be required to be included  
in the Directors’ Report, as the Board considers them to be of strategic importance. The Strategic Report can be found on pages 1 to 49. 

Non-financial information statement
In addition to the above referenced sections of the Annual Report, the Stakeholder Index and non-financial information sections of the Annual Report 
set out on pages 32 to 33 are intended to help stakeholders understand the Group’s development, performance, and impact of its activities, information 
relating to the environment, employee, social, respect for human rights, anti-corruption and anti-bribery matters in accordance with the non-financial 
reporting requirements contained in sections 414CA and 414CB of the Companies Act 2006.

74

Results and dividend 
The financial statements set out the Group’s results for the year ended 25 July 2020 and are contained in pages 85 to 105. The Group’s loss after tax for 
the financial year ended 25 July 2020 of £2.2m (2019: profit after tax £11.4m) is reported in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income on 
page 85. Despite the strength of the Group’s balance sheet, the Board did not feel it was appropriate to pay an interim or a final dividend at a time when 
it was receiving cash through the support mechanisms provided by the UK government, and the cash was used to protect the financial strength and 
resilience of the Group. The Board recognises the importance of income to the Group’s shareholders and will continue to assess when it is appropriate  
to re-commence dividend payments. Movements in reserves are shown in the Statement of Changes in Equity on page 87.

Articles of association
The Company’s Articles of Association may only be amended by special resolution at a general meeting of the shareholders. 

Share capital
Details of the Company’s issued share capital are shown in note 9 on page 111.

The Company has one class of ordinary shares which carry no fixed income. Each share carries the right to one vote at general meetings. The ordinary 
shares are listed on the Official List and are traded on the London Stock Exchange. No person has any special rights over the Company’s share capital  
and all issued shares are fully paid. There are no restrictions on voting rights or the transfer of securities in the Company and the Directors are not aware 
of any agreements between holders of the Company’s shares that may result in such restrictions.

Details of outstanding employee share options and the operation of relevant schemes are shown in note 22 on pages 102 and 103. 

Authority to purchase shares
The Company was authorised by shareholders at the 2019 AGM to purchase in the market up to 10% of the Company’s issued share capital, as permitted 
under the Company’s Articles of Association. A renewal of this authority will be proposed at the 2020 AGM. During the year, the Company purchased 
1,996,454 ordinary shares with a total nominal value of £1,996.45 at a price of 220.0p per ordinary share from related party Parlour Product Holdings (LUX) 
S.A.R.L for a total consideration of £4.4m. Following this purchase, the ordinary shares purchased by the Company were cancelled. 

Employee Benefit Trust
The Company established the ScS Group plc Employee Benefit Trust (EBT) with Sanne Fiduciary Services Limited as the Trustees in Jersey in January 
2015. The purpose of the EBT continues to be to hold shares in trust in connection with the Group’s share incentive schemes. During the financial year to 
25 July 2020, the Trust purchased 324,582 ordinary shares of £0.001 each in the Group at an average price of 232.2p per ordinary share, of which 290,025 
were used to satisfy awards. The EBT has waived any dividends which it may be entitled to receive in respect of ordinary shares held by it, and has also 
agreed to waive voting rights to such shares. 77,275 ordinary shares in the Group remained held as treasury shares at 25 July 2020. 

Significant agreements – change of control
The Company is not party to any significant agreements that would take effect, alter or terminate upon a change in control of the Company following a
takeover. The Directors are not aware of any agreements between the Company and its Directors and employees that provide for compensation for loss
of office or employment that occurs following a takeover bid, except that provisions of the Company’s share plans may cause options and awards granted
under such plans to vest on a takeover.

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020Streamlined energy and carbon reporting statement

Emission type

Scope 1: combustion

Scope 2: purchased energy

Scope 3: indirect energy

Total

kWh

CO2e tonnes (Location based)

Current year 
(2019/2020)

Previous year 
(2018/2019)

Variance %

Current year 
(2019/2020)

Previous year 
(2018/2019)

Variance %

12,796,459

16,200,593

13,297,222

15,557,852

1,991,785

333,736

28,085,466

32,092,181

(21%)

(15%)

497%

(12%)

2,838

3,399

487

6,724

3,670

4,404

82

8,156

(23%)

(23%)

494%

(18%)

Greenhouse gas emissions intensity ratio

Turnover (£’000)

Intensity ratio (tCO2e/£100,000)

Total footprint (scope 1, scope 2 and scope 3) – CO2e tonnes

Current year 
(2019/2020)

Previous year 
(2018/2019)

268,119

2.508

333,267

2.447

Variance %

(19.5%)

2.5%

The COVID-19 pandemic has had an impact on our turnover and carbon emissions. The relative impact on turnover is directly linked to reduced operations 
but we still have to produce some carbon emissions to maintain essential systems in our estate. This means that on a relative basis our performance is not 
directly comparable but is presented here for transparency and compliance with the Streamlined Energy and Carbon Reporting requirements.

GHG protocol dual reporting

Emission type

Scope 1: combustion

Scope 2: purchased energy

Scope 3: indirect energy

Total

CO2e tonnes (dual reporting methodology)

Location based

Market based 
(Supplier specific)

2,838

3,399

487

6,724

2,838

3,550

487

6,875

Var. %

0%

4%

0%

2%

75

 – Our methodology has been based on the principals of the Greenhouse Gas Protocol, taking account of the 2015 amendment which sets out a ‘dual reporting’ 
methodology for the reporting of Scope 2 emissions. In the ‘Total Footprint’ summary above, purchased electricity is reported on a location-based method.

 – We have reported on all the measured emissions sources required under The Companies (Directors’ Report) and Limited Liability Partnerships 

(Energy and Carbon Report) Regulations 2018, except where stated.

 – The period of our report is 1 August 2019 to 31 July 2020.
 – This includes limited emissions under Scope 1 and 2 (gas & fuel used in transport; purchased electricity), except where stated, and limited emissions 

under Scope 3 (fuel used in personal/hire cars/vehicles for business purposes).

 – Energy use and emissions figures relate to our UK operation (including offshore energy and emissions) only, except where stated.
 – Conversion factors for UK electricity (location-based methodology), gas and other emissions are those published by the Department for 

Environment, Food and Rural Affairs for 2019/20.

 – Conversion factors for UK electricity (market-based methodology) are published on the fuel mix disclosures on each supplier’s website.
 – Gas data has not been estimated where non-billed months of data were received. This is due to a combination of known issues, such as supplier 
overbilling followed by periods of zero (catch-up) billing, sites moving to electricity only and expected variation in consumption (due to both 
seasonality and the COVID-19 outbreak). This approach is consistent with the ESOS methodology.

Statement of exclusions
 – No known exclusions.

Directors and their interests
Details of the Directors of the Company as at 25 July 2020 are shown on pages 50 and 51 and their interests in shares and share awards made to them 
under share incentive schemes in the Company are shown in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on page 66, all of which form part of this report.  
There have been no changes in the Board of the Company since that date.

The appointment and replacement of Directors is governed by the Company’s Articles of Association, the UK Corporate Governance Code, the 
Companies Act 2006 and related legislation. All the Directors will seek re-election at the AGM. A Director may be appointed by ordinary resolution of the 
shareholders or by the Board. The Board may from time to time appoint a Director to fill a vacancy or as an additional Director, provided that the individual 
seeks election at the next AGM.

The directors of the company who were in office during the year and up to the date of signing the financial statements were:
Alan Smith  
George Adams 
Paul Daccus 
Ron McMillan 
Angela Luger 
David Knight 
Chris Muir   

Non-Executive Chairman
Non-Executive Director
Non-Executive Director (Resigned 11 February 2020)
Non-Executive Director
Non-Executive Director 
Chief Executive Officer
Chief Financial Officer

Subject to provisions of the Companies Act 2006, the Company’s Articles of Association, and to any directions given by special resolution, the business 
of the Company shall be managed by the Board, which may exercise all the powers of the Company.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSDirectors’ Report continued

Directors’ indemnities
As permitted by the Company’s Articles of Association, the Directors have the benefit of an indemnity which is applicable in certain circumstances.  
The Company also purchased and maintains Directors’ and Officers’ liability insurance. Both the insurance and indemnities applied throughout the 
financial year ended 25 July 2020 and through to the date of this report.

Employee involvement
The Group’s policy is to actively involve its employees in the business and to ensure that matters of concern to them, including the aims and objectives and 
the financial and economic factors which impact thereon, are communicated in an open and regular manner. This is achieved principally through three sales 
conferences (either physically or virtually) held at meaningful times during the year supported by regular senior management meetings and briefings, both on 
a national and regional basis, and a comprehensive regular newsletter which is made available to all employees. As a consequence of the COVID-19 outbreak, 
only the Autumn sales conference was able to go ahead. Internal communications were significantly increased from the start of lockdown as detailed on page 
6, and we continued to hold the Directors discussions group with our designated Non-Executive Workforce Engagement Director, George Adams, virtually.

We also encourage colleagues to become involved in the financial performance of our business through a variety of share and bonus schemes.  
Employee engagement is considered further within our Stakeholder Index on page 33.

Our Code of Conduct which applies across the Group sets out the standard of behaviour expected of all of our people and includes guidance on policies 
such as: anti-bribery, conflicts of interest, and whistle-blowing procedures. We have a zero-tolerance approach to bribery and provide our colleagues  
with the ability to raise concerns regarding misconduct via an independent and confidential whistle-blowing service.

Equal opportunities 
The Group is committed to providing equality of opportunity to employees and potential employees. This applies to recruitment, training, career 
development and promotion for all employees, regardless of physical ability, gender, sexual orientation, religion, age or ethnic origin. Full and fair 
consideration is given to employment applications by disabled persons wherever suitable opportunities exist, having regard to their particular aptitudes 
and abilities. Training and career development support is provided where appropriate. Should an employee become disabled, efforts are made to ensure 
their continued employment with the Group, with retraining being provided if necessary.

Charitable and political donations
During the year, the Group made charitable donations, including funds raised by employees, of £66,000 (2019: £18,000). No political donations, expenditure 
or contributions have been made or incurred (2019: £nil). 

76

Events after the balance sheet date
On 25 August 2020, the Group arranged a £20.0m CLBILS revolving credit facility (RCF). This facility is committed for a term of 36 months and would be 
renegotiated well in advance of this maturity date. The RCF is subject to certain covenants in respect of fixed charge cover, liquidity, leverage and capital spending.

Going concern
Having considered the Group’s current trading and cash flow generation, including severe but plausible stress testing scenarios, the Directors have 
concluded that it is appropriate to prepare the Group financial statements on a going concern basis.

Major interest in shares
As at 9 September 2020 the following shareholders have notified the Company of their interest in 3% or more of the Company’s issued share capital:

Number of  
shares held

% of issued  
share capital

Number of  
shares held

% of issued  
share capital

M&G Investment Management

Artemis Investment Management

Tellworth Investments

Stadium Capital Management

SCION Asset Management

Fidelity International 

4,645,529

4,583,920

3.525,690

1,855,177

1,850,119

1,757,161

12.22 Premier Miton Investors

12.06 Huntington Management 

9.28 Mr David Knight

Bank of America Merrill Lynch 
International as principal

4.88

4.87 Columbia Threadneedle Investments

4.62

1,719,766

1,649,587

1,528,615

1,489,103

1,175,000

4.52

4.34

4.03

3.92

3.09

Annual General Meeting 
A notice convening the Company’s Annual General Meeting on 25 November 2020 will be issued to shareholders separately. 

Auditors
The Group’s independent auditors, PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (PwC), have indicated their willingness to continue in office and the Audit Committee 
has recommended that PwC remain in office. A resolution to re-appoint PwC as auditors will be put to the members at the Annual General Meeting. 
So far as the Directors are aware, there is no relevant audit information of which the auditors are unaware. The Directors have taken all steps that they ought 
to have taken as directors to make themselves aware of any relevant audit information and to establish that the auditors are aware of that information.

By order of the Board

Richard Butts
Company Secretary
1 October 2020

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities

The directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report and the financial statements in accordance with applicable law and regulation.

Company law requires the directors to prepare financial statements for each financial year. Under that law the directors have prepared the group financial 
statements in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the European Union and company financial statements 
in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice (United Kingdom Accounting Standards, comprising FRS 101 “Reduced 
Disclosure Framework”, and applicable law). Under company law the directors must not approve the financial statements unless they are satisfied  
that they give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the group and company and of the profit or loss of the group and company for that period.  
In preparing the financial statements, the directors are required to:
 – Select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently;
 – State whether applicable IFRSs as adopted by the European Union have been followed for the group financial statements and United Kingdom 

Accounting Standards, comprising FRS 101, have been followed for the company financial statements, subject to any material departures disclosed 
and explained in the financial statements;

 – Make judgements and accounting estimates that are reasonable and prudent; and
 – Prepare the financial statements on the going concern basis unless it is inappropriate to presume that the Group and Company will continue in business.

The directors are also responsible for safeguarding the assets of the group and company and hence for taking reasonable steps for the prevention and 
detection of fraud and other irregularities.

The directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain the group and company’s transactions and 
disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the group and company and enable them to ensure that the financial statements and 
the Directors’ Remuneration Report comply with the Companies Act 2006 and, as regards the group financial statements, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation.

The directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the company’s website. Legislation in the United Kingdom governing the preparation 
and dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions.

Directors’ confirmations
The directors consider that the annual report and accounts, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the information 
necessary for shareholders to assess the group and company’s position and performance, business model and strategy.

Each of the directors, whose names and functions are listed in Board of Directors section confirm that, to the best of their knowledge:
 – The Company financial statements, which have been prepared in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice  

(United Kingdom Accounting Standards, comprising FRS 101 ‘Reduced Disclosure Framework’, and applicable law), give a true and fair view of the 
assets, liabilities, financial position and profit of the Company;

 – The Group financial statements, which have been prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the European Union, give a true and fair view  

of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit of the Group; and

 – The Directors’ Report includes a fair review of the development and performance of the business and the position of the Group and Company, 

together with a description of the principal risks and uncertainties that it faces.

77

By order of the Board

Richard Butts
Company Secretary
1 October 2020

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSIndependent Auditors’ Report 
to the Members of ScS Group plc

Report on the audit of the financial statements
Opinion
In our opinion:
 – ScS Group plc’s group financial statements and company financial statements (the “financial statements”) give a true and fair view of the state of the 
group’s and of the company’s affairs as at 25 July 2020 and of the group’s loss and the group’s and the company’s cash flows for the year then ended;
 – the group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the 

European Union;

 – the company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice (United 

Kingdom Accounting Standards, comprising FRS 101 “Reduced Disclosure Framework”, and applicable law); and

 – the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and, as regards the group financial 

statements, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation.

We have audited the financial statements, included within the Annual Report 2020 (the “Annual Report”), which comprise: the consolidated and company 
statements of financial position as at 25 July 2020; the consolidated statement of comprehensive income, the consolidated and company statements  
of cash flows, and the consolidated and company statements of changes in equity for the year then ended; and the notes to the financial statements, 
which include a description of the significant accounting policies.

Our opinion is consistent with our reporting to the Audit Committee.

Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (“ISAs (UK)”) and applicable law. Our responsibilities under ISAs (UK) 
are further described in the Auditors’ responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements section of our report. We believe that the audit evidence  
we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion.

Independence
We remained independent of the group in accordance with the ethical requirements that are relevant to our audit of the financial statements in the UK, 
which includes the FRC’s Ethical Standard, as applicable to listed public interest entities, and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in accordance 
with these requirements.

78

To the best of our knowledge and belief, we declare that non-audit services prohibited by the FRC’s Ethical Standard were not provided to the group  
or the company.

Other than those disclosed in note 4 to the financial statements, we have provided no non-audit services to the group or the company in the period  
from 28 July 2019 to 25 July 2020.

Our audit approach
Overview

 – Overall group materiality: £2,000,000 (2019: £1,136,000), based on 1% of revenue, capped at 20% of the five year average 

Materiality

 – Overall company materiality: £702,000 (2019: £700,000), based on 1% of total assets.

(loss)/profit before tax (2019: 0.35% of revenue).

Audit  
scope

 – We performed an audit of the complete financial information of the Group’s trading entity, A Share & Sons Limited, as well as 
auditing ScS group plc (the Company’s) equity balance. This approach provides 100% coverage over the Group’s revenue.

 – Desktop reviews were performed over all out of scope components.

Key audit 
matters

 – Group: Impairment of assets in relation to loss making stores.
 – Group: IFRS 16 (Leases) and recognition of right of use assets and lease liabilities.
 – Group and Company: COVID-19 impact and consideration of Going Concern.
 – Company: Carrying value of Investments in subsidiaries.

The scope of our audit
As part of designing our audit, we determined materiality and assessed the risks of material misstatement in the financial statements.

Capability of the audit in detecting irregularities, including fraud
Based on our understanding of the group and industry, we identified that the principal risks of non-compliance with laws and regulations related to the 
Listing Rules and UK tax legislation, and we considered the extent to which non-compliance might have a material effect on the financial statements, 
and we considered the extent to which non-compliance might have a material effect on the financial statements. We also considered those laws and 
regulations that have a direct impact on the preparation of the financial statements such as the Companies Act 2006. We evaluated management’s 
incentives and opportunities for fraudulent manipulation of the financial statements (including the risk of override of controls), and determined that the 

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020principal risks were related to posting inappropriate journal entries to increase revenue or increase the group’s EBITDA, or through management bias  
in manipulation of accounting estimates. The group engagement team included appropriate audit procedures in response to such risks in their work. 
Audit procedures performed by the group engagement team included:
 – Discussions with management and internal audit, including consideration of known or suspected instances of non-compliance with laws and 

regulation and fraud;
 – Review of board minutes;
 – Review of legal expenditure in the year to identify potential non-compliance with laws and regulation;
 – Evaluation of management’s controls designed to prevent and detect irregularities, in particular their anti-bribery controls;
 – Challenging assumptions and judgements made by management in their significant accounting estimates, in particular in relation to impairment  
of assets, adoption of IFRS 16 (Leases) and consideration of the impact of COVID-19 on going concern and the impairment of the investment  
in the company (see related key audit matters below); 

 – Identifying and testing journal entries, in particular any journal entries posted with unusual account combinations.

There are inherent limitations in the audit procedures described above and the further removed non-compliance with laws and regulations is from 
the events and transactions reflected in the financial statements, the less likely we would become aware of it. Also, the risk of not detecting a material 
misstatement due to fraud is higher than the risk of not detecting one resulting from error, as fraud may involve deliberate concealment by, for example, 
forgery or intentional misrepresentations, or through collusion.

Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in the auditors’ professional judgement, were of most significance in the audit of the financial statements of the 
current period and include the most significant assessed risks of material misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) identified by the auditors, including 
those which had the greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy; the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts of the engagement 
team. These matters, and any comments we make on the results of our procedures thereon, were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial 
statements as a whole, and in forming our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters. This is not a complete list of all 
risks identified by our audit. 

Key audit matter

Group

How our audit addressed the key audit matter

Impairment of assets in relation to loss making stores
Refer to page 59 (Audit Committee Report)

We obtained the impairment workings from management and checked their 
arithmetical accuracy. 

79

ScS Group plc has 100 stores at the year end. The nature of 
the business is such that, when all costs have been allocated 
on a store by store basis, some stores’ fixed assets and right 
of use assets are not covered by the present value of its 
future cash flows. This gives rise to potential impairment  
of the assets.

Management have used EBITDA as a proxy for cash flows, 
exclusive of rent repayments.

We recognise that there are a number of judgements 
involved in the asset impairment calculation, including 
forecasting of future results, length of leases, allocation  
of costs and use of an appropriate discount rate. As such,  
the judgements involved in the impairment of asset 
calculation were an area of focus.

Management have calculated an impairment charge of 
£3.4m, which has been treated as an exceptional item in the 
Statement of comprehensive income as it is management’s 
view that the additional impairment required is a result of  
the impact of COVID-19 on the Group’s future cash flows.

We agreed that all store rent payments per management’s IFRS 16 calculation had been 
allocated to stores and agreed allocation of fixed assets on a sample basis by vouching 
to invoice. We assessed the store by store allocation of revenue and direct costs for 
reasonableness by comparing to the store’s historical results over the previous two 
years as a percentage of the total results achieved. We agreed that central costs had 
been allocated on a reasonable basis to the underlying stores with no exceptions noted. 
We agreed that the rent was correctly excluded from the stores EBITDA. There were  
no issues noted with the underlying data used in calculating the impairment provision. 

Management’s assessment of which stores were at risk of impairment was based on the 
forecast future performance of individual stores in the group’s portfolio. We assessed 
the robustness of the groups’ forecasting process in the prior years and the underlying 
historical accuracy. This excluded forecasting of the current year result given the 
unforeseen impact of COVID-19. We have also considered actual results achieved post 
year end. Management’s forecasting was considered to be suitably robust and accurate.

We agreed the FY21 forecast results used in the asset impairment calculation were 
consistent with board approved budgets. We assessed the reasonableness of the 
assumptions used in the calculation and performed sensitivities where appropriate. 
This included, but was not limited to, utilising our valuations experts to perform an 
assessment of discount rate and store growth rates with reference to the macro-
economic and industry predictions. We concluded that the level of impairment  
of fixed assets and right of use assets in the store portfolio was materially correct.

We assessed the reasonableness of the impairment charge being treated as an 
exceptional item within the Statement of comprehensive income and agreed this  
was acceptable based on the nature and magnitude of the impairment charge.  
We have assessed completeness and accuracy of the related disclosures within  
the financial statements.

We are satisfied the assumptions made by management in determining the asset 
impairment and the related disclosures in the financial statements are appropriate.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSIndependent Auditors’ Report 
to the Members of ScS Group plc continued

Key audit matter

How our audit addressed the key audit matter

IFRS 16 (Leases) and recognition of right of use assets  
and lease liabilities
Refer to page 59 (Audit Committee Report)

ScS Group plc has 100 stores at the year end, 9 distribution 
centres and a number of cars, the majority of which are 
leased. The Group is required to recognise a lease liability and 
corresponding right of use asset in relation to the agreements 
which meet the IFRS 16 criteria of a lease. The Group has 
elected to apply IFRS 16 under the modified retrospective 
transition option. 

On transition a £5.8m adjustment relating to impairment of 
the right of use asset was recognised by the Group in reserves. 
This arose due to differences in cost allocation and discount 
rate between the Group’s onerous lease calculation and 
impairment model and involves judgement.

The calculation of lease liabilities requires assumptions  
to be made in relation to the discount rate, which can  
have a significant impact on the lease liabilities recognised. 

Estimation uncertainty arises in respect of the discount rate 
where the implicit rate in the lease is not available, as is typical 
in the Group’s store leases. In those circumstances the 
Group bases the discount rate on the incremental borrowing 
rate. The incremental borrowing rate is an unobservable 
input based on assumptions of the Group’s credit risk and 
specific risks of leased assets. Small changes in discount 
rate assumptions across a number of leases could lead to 
a material change in the valuation of lease liabilities and the 
corresponding right of use asset. 

As a result of COVID-19, the Group were granted a number 
of waivers and deferrals in respect of their lease agreements, 
which were recognised as lease modifications during the year. 

We assessed management’s accounting policy for leases to verify that it was compliant 
with IFRS 16, and concluded that their policy was appropriate. 

We leveraged work performed in the prior year over the transition impact of IFRS 16. This 
included testing the completeness and accuracy of the data used by management in its 
lease accounting, corroborating key data inputs to the underlying lease documents. We 
recalculated a sample of lease contracts to verify that the accounting entries had been 
appropriately determined by management and ensured this calculation methodology 
was applied consistently across the population of similar leases. 

Assisted by our valuation experts, we independently assessed management’s 
methodology used to determine the discount rates applied to the lease portfolio and 
found this to be supportable.

We agreed any lease modifications made on transition to underlying lease contracts  
on a sample basis. 

We evaluated the transition model prepared by management in respect of impairment 
and agreed consistency of the underlying data to the prior year audit work and validated 
the integrity of the calculation methodology. We agreed the reasonableness of the 
discount rate applied with our experts and considered the reasonableness of judgements 
taken by management.

We have tested the lease waivers and deferrals during the year back to corroborating 
evidence from the landlords to ensure they have been correctly recognised. 

We considered completeness of the IFRS 16 calculation by testing the reconciliation 
of the Group’s operating lease commitments as reported in the prior year financial 
statements to the IFRS 16 calculation as at the adoption date.

We assessed the completeness and accuracy of disclosures within the financial statements.

We are satisfied the transition to IFRS 16, including recognition of the right of use asset 
and lease liabilities, and the related disclosures in the financial statements are appropriate.

80

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020Key audit matter

Group and Company

COVID-19 impact and consideration of Going Concern
Refer to page 59 (Audit Committee Report)

The ongoing COVID-19 pandemic is having a significant 
impact on the UK economy in which the Group operates. 
As a result, the Group and Company have faced operational 
challenges and there remains significant uncertainty as to  
the duration of the pandemic and what its lasting impact will 
be on the economy.

The pandemic was a present condition at 25 July 2020 and 
is something that is continually evolving. The Directors have 
considered the potential impact of the evolving pandemic 
across the business and on the financial statements.

Management have considered the impact on the carrying 
value of the Group’s fixed assets, including right of use assets, 
in relation to loss making stores for impairment as a result  
of the ongoing pandemic, and have also considered the 
impact on the Company’s carrying value of investment in  
its subsidiaries. 

In relation to the Group’s going concern assessment, 
management have considered the implications of COVID-19 
and have undertaken an assessment including a review of the 
anticipated performance and forecast future cash flows of 
the Group and the potential ongoing impact of the ongoing 
pandemic. Management have also stress tested the cash 
flow forecasts reflecting what they consider to be a severe yet 
plausible downside scenario resulting from the consequences 
of COVID-19. 

Having taken into account these models, together with a 
robust assessment of planned and possible mitigating actions, 
management has concluded that the Group remains a going 
concern, and that there is no material uncertainty in respect of 
this conclusion. Management has described its going concern 
and viability assessment on page 49 of the Annual Report.

Company

Carrying value of Investments in subsidiaries 
Refer to pages 109 and 110 (Notes to the Company  
Financial Statements)

The Company holds an investment in its subsidiary 
undertakings, at a carrying value of £70m (2019: £70m). 
The Company is required to assess the investment in its 
subsidiary annually for impairment.

The test for impairment compares the carrying value of the 
investment in subsidiary balance to the higher of their fair 
value or value-in-use using an impairment model. 

Following the downturn in the market as a result of COVID-19 
and the uncertainty of the future market, there is a risk that 
the valuation of the Company’s investment in its subsidiary 
entities could be impaired. 

How our audit addressed the key audit matter

We have considered the carrying value of the Groups fixed assets, including right of use 
assets, in relation to loss making stores within the specific key audit matter; impairment 
of assets in relation to loss making stores, and the carrying value of the Company’s 
investments in its subsidiaries within the specific key audit matter; Carrying value  
of investments in subsidiaries.

We have re-evaluated our risk assessment, including the going concern risk of the Group. 
Based on management’s assessment and our audit procedures thereon as described 
below, we consider our original risk assessment to remain appropriate and therefore 
consider going concern to be a significant risk for the Group.

In assessing management’s consideration of the potential impact on the Group going 
concern assessment of COVID-19, we have undertaken the following audit procedures:
 – We obtained from management their latest forecasts that support the board’s 

assessment and conclusions with respect to the going concern basis of preparation 
of the financial statements.

 – We assessed the management accounts for the financial year to date and checked 
that these were consistent with the starting point of management’s forecasts.  
We also checked the arithmetical accuracy of management’s forecasts.

 – We evaluated management’s board approved budget and cash flow forecast and 
severe yet plausible downside scenario for the period to July 2023. We challenged 
the adequacy and appropriateness of the underlying assumptions and significant 
forecast cash flows.

 – We understood the mitigating actions taken by management to date and confirmed 
the available mitigating actions in management’s model are within their control and 
can be taken on a timely basis, if needed.

 – We evaluated the level of forecast liquidity and forecast compliance with the bank 
facility covenants, which included further downside sensitivity to management’s 
severe but plausible downside and agreed to source documentation.

Our findings and conclusions in respect of going concern are set out in the ‘Going 
concern’ section below.

We have evaluated management’s disclosures in the financial statements in relation to 
COVID-19 and are satisfied that they are consistent with the risks affecting the Group, 
their impact assessment and the procedures that we have performed.

81

We have assessed the Company’s share price and market capitalisation, comparing this 
to the aggregate carrying value of the investment in subsidiary balance.

Given the fluctuating nature of the share price during the year, we have obtained a cash 
flow forecast model from management to support the carrying value of the investment 
in subsidiary balance. We have checked the mathematical accuracy and integrity of the 
model and assessed that it meets the requirements of IAS 36. 

We have agreed the forecasted EBITDA (used as a proxy for cash flow) has been agreed 
to board approved budgets and is consistent with the forecasted model used within the 
impairment of asset calculation and going concern model. See details in the above key 
audit matters for work performed in relation to assessment of the appropriateness of 
the budgeted forecasts. 

We used internal valuation experts to assess the appropriateness of the discount  
rate assumptions and found this to be reasonable. We evaluated other material 
assumptions applied to the cash flow forecasts with reference to the macro-economic 
and industry predictions. 

We assessed the completeness and accuracy of disclosures within the financial statements.

We are satisfied the assumptions made by management in determining the valuation 
and the related disclosures in the financial statements are appropriate.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSIndependent Auditors’ Report 
to the Members of ScS Group plc continued

How we tailored the audit scope
We tailored the scope of our audit to ensure that we performed enough work to be able to give an opinion on the financial statements as a whole,  
taking into account the structure of the group and the company, the accounting processes and controls, and the industry in which they operate.

As part of designing our audit, we determined materiality and assessed the risks of material misstatement in the financial statements. In particular, we 
looked at where the directors made subjective judgements, for example in respect of significant accounting estimates that involved making assumptions 
and considering future events that are inherently uncertain. As in all of our audits we also addressed the risk of management override of internal controls, 
including evaluating whether there was evidence of bias by the directors that represented a risk of material misstatement due to fraud.

Materiality
The scope of our audit was influenced by our application of materiality. We set certain quantitative thresholds for materiality. These, together with qualitative 
considerations, helped us to determine the scope of our audit and the nature, timing and extent of our audit procedures on the individual financial statement 
line items and disclosures and in evaluating the effect of misstatements, both individually and in aggregate on the financial statements as a whole. 

Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality for the financial statements as a whole as follows:

Overall materiality

£2,000,000 (2019: £1,136,000).

Group financial statements

Company financial statements

£702,000 (2019: £700,000).

How we determined it

1% of revenue, capped at 20% of the five year average 
(loss)/profit before tax (2019: 0.35% of revenue). 

1% of total assets.

Rationale for benchmark applied

Based on our professional judgement and our knowledge 
of the client, materiality was based on 1% of revenue 
which is a standard materiality benchmark particularly in 
low margin businesses such as ScS Group plc. However,  
it is important that we are mindful of our materiality level 
in the context of the business’ profitability. Consequently, 
we capped the materiality level applied at 20% of the  
five year average profit/loss before tax.

Based on our professional judgement and our knowledge 
of the client our materiality was based on 1.0%  
(2019: 1.0%) of total assets giving an overall materiality 
of £702,000 (2019: £700,000). We used 1.0% of total 
assets as the benchmark for our materiality calculations 
due to the entity being a holding company with limited 
activity and our judgement around what would affect 
the decisions of the members.

82

For each component in the scope of our group audit, we allocated a materiality that is less than our overall group materiality. The materiality allocated  
to A Share & Sons Limited was £1,900,000, this was the only component in scope.

We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report to them misstatements identified during our audit above £100,000 (Group audit) (2019: £56,800) 
and £35,000 (Company audit) (2019: £35,000) as well as misstatements below those amounts that, in our view, warranted reporting for qualitative reasons.

Going concern
In accordance with ISAs (UK) we report as follows:

Reporting obligation

Outcome

We are required to report if we have anything material to add or draw attention 
to in respect of the directors’ statement in the financial statements about 
whether the directors considered it appropriate to adopt the going concern 
basis of accounting in preparing the financial statements and the directors’ 
identification of any material uncertainties to the group’s and the company’s 
ability to continue as a going concern over a period of at least twelve months 
from the date of approval of the financial statements.

We have nothing material to add or to draw attention to.

However, because not all future events or conditions can be predicted, 
this statement is not a guarantee as to the group’s and company’s ability 
to continue as a going concern. 

We are required to report if the directors’ statement relating to Going Concern 
in accordance with Listing Rule 9.8.6R(3) is materially inconsistent with our 
knowledge obtained in the audit.

We have nothing to report.

Reporting on other information 
The other information comprises all of the information in the Annual Report other than the financial statements and our auditors’ report thereon.  
The directors are responsible for the other information. Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other information and,  
accordingly, we do not express an audit opinion or, except to the extent otherwise explicitly stated in this report, any form of assurance thereon. 

In connection with our audit of the financial statements, our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether the other 
information is materially inconsistent with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the audit, or otherwise appears to be materially misstated. 
If we identify an apparent material inconsistency or material misstatement, we are required to perform procedures to conclude whether there is a material 
misstatement of the financial statements or a material misstatement of the other information. If, based on the work we have performed, we conclude that 
there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are required to report that fact. We have nothing to report based on these responsibilities.

With respect to the Strategic Report and Directors’ Report, we also considered whether the disclosures required by the UK Companies Act 2006 have 
been included. 

Based on the responsibilities described above and our work undertaken in the course of the audit, the Companies Act 2006 (CA06), ISAs (UK) and the 
Listing Rules of the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) require us also to report certain opinions and matters as described below (required by ISAs (UK) 
unless otherwise stated).

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020Strategic Report and Directors’ Report
In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit, the information given in the Strategic Report and Directors’ Report for the year 
ended 25 July 2020 is consistent with the financial statements and has been prepared in accordance with applicable legal requirements. (CA06)

In light of the knowledge and understanding of the group and company and their environment obtained in the course of the audit, we did not identify  
any material misstatements in the Strategic Report and Directors’ Report. (CA06)

The directors’ assessment of the prospects of the group and of the principal risks that would threaten the solvency or liquidity of the group
We have nothing material to add or draw attention to regarding:
 – The directors’ confirmation on page 60 of the Annual Report that they have carried out a robust assessment of the principal risks facing the group, 

including those that would threaten its business model, future performance, solvency or liquidity.

 – The disclosures in the Annual Report that describe those risks and explain how they are being managed or mitigated.
 – The directors’ explanation on page 49 of the Annual Report as to how they have assessed the prospects of the group, over what period they have done 

so and why they consider that period to be appropriate, and their statement as to whether they have a reasonable expectation that the group will be able 
to continue in operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due over the period of their assessment, including any related disclosures drawing attention 
to any necessary qualifications or assumptions.

We have nothing to report having performed a review of the directors’ statement that they have carried out a robust assessment of the principal risks 
facing the group and statement in relation to the longer-term viability of the group. Our review was substantially less in scope than an audit and only 
consisted of making inquiries and considering the directors’ process supporting their statements; checking that the statements are in alignment with  
the relevant provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code (the “Code”); and considering whether the statements are consistent with the knowledge 
and understanding of the group and company and their environment obtained in the course of the audit. (Listing Rules)

Other Code Provisions
We have nothing to report in respect of our responsibility to report when: 
 – The statement given by the directors, on page 77, that they consider the Annual Report taken as a whole to be fair, balanced and understandable,  
and provides the information necessary for the members to assess the group’s and company’s position and performance, business model and 
strategy is materially inconsistent with our knowledge of the group and company obtained in the course of performing our audit.

 – The section of the Annual Report on page 59 describing the work of the Audit Committee does not appropriately address matters communicated  

by us to the Audit Committee.

 – The directors’ statement relating to the company’s compliance with the Code does not properly disclose a departure from a relevant provision  

of the Code specified, under the Listing Rules, for review by the auditors.

Directors’ Remuneration
In our opinion, the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006. (CA06)

83

Responsibilities for the financial statements and the audit
Responsibilities of the directors for the financial statements
As explained more fully in the Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities, the directors are responsible for the preparation of the financial statements in 
accordance with the applicable framework and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view. The directors are also responsible for such internal control 
as they determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.

In preparing the financial statements, the directors are responsible for assessing the group’s and the company’s ability to continue as a going concern, 
disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern and using the going concern basis of accounting unless the directors either intend to liquidate 
the group or the company or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.

Auditors’ responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free from material misstatement, whether due 
to fraud or error, and to issue an auditors’ report that includes our opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an 
audit conducted in accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from fraud or error and are 
considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis 
of these financial statements. 

A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located on the FRC’s website at:  
www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our auditors’ report.

Use of this report
This report, including the opinions, has been prepared for and only for the company’s members as a body in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the 
Companies Act 2006 and for no other purpose. We do not, in giving these opinions, accept or assume responsibility for any other purpose or to any other 
person to whom this report is shown or into whose hands it may come save where expressly agreed by our prior consent in writing.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSIndependent Auditors’ Report 
to the Members of ScS Group plc continued

Other required reporting
Companies Act 2006 exception reporting
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:
 – we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or
 – adequate accounting records have not been kept by the company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received from branches not visited 

by us; or

 – certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or
 – the company financial statements and the part of the Directors’ Remuneration Report to be audited are not in agreement with the accounting records 

and returns. 

We have no exceptions to report arising from this responsibility. 

Appointment
Following the recommendation of the Audit committee, we were appointed by the directors on 3 November 2009 to audit the financial statements for the 
year ended 31 July 2009 and subsequent financial periods. The period of total uninterrupted engagement is 12 years, covering the years ended 31 July 2009 
to 25 July 2020. The audit went out to competitive tender for the year end 27 July 2019 and we were reappointed as auditors on 21 November 2018.

Andy Ward (Senior Statutory Auditor)
for and on behalf of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP
Chartered Accountants and Statutory Auditors
Newcastle upon Tyne
1 October 2020

84

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income 
For the year ended 25 July 2020

Gross sales

Revenue
Cost of sales

Gross profit
Distribution costs
Administrative expenses

Operating profit

Analysed as:
Underlying operating profit
Exceptional items included within administrative expenses

Operating profit

Finance costs
Finance income

Net finance (costs)/income

(Loss)/profit before taxation
Tax credit/(charge)

(Loss)/profit from continuing operations

Loss from discontinued operations

(Loss)/profit for the period

Attributable to:
Owners of the parent
(Loss)/profit and total comprehensive income for the year 

(Loss)/earnings per share (expressed in pence per share):
Basic (loss)/earnings per share

Diluted (loss)/earnings per share

There is no variance between the diluted and basic earnings per share in the current year.

There are no other sources of comprehensive income.

Note

3

3

4

5

7
8

9

31

10

10

2020
£’000

268,119

255,491
(135,911)

119,580
(16,988)
(101,873)

719

4,708
(3,989)

719

(4,195)
355

(3,840)

(3,121)
898

(2,223)

–

2019
£’000

333,267

317,406
(167,547)

149,859
(17,310)
(118,610)

13,939

14,291
(352)

13,939

(96)
417

321

14,260
(2,880)

11,380

(4)

(2,223)

11,376

(2,223)

11,376

85

(5.8p)

(5.8p)

28.5p

27.4p

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSConsolidated Statement of Financial Position 
As at 25 July 2020

Non-current assets
Intangible assets
Property, plant and equipment
Right-of-use asset
Deferred tax asset 

Total non-current assets

Current assets
Inventories
Trade and other receivables
Current income tax receivable
Cash and cash equivalents

Total current assets

Total assets

Current liabilities
Current income tax liabilities
Trade and other payables
Provisions
Lease liabilities 

Total current liabilities

Non-current liabilities
Trade and other payables
Deferred tax liability
Provisions
Lease liabilities

86

Total non-current liabilities

Total liabilities

Capital and reserves attributable to the owners of the parent
Share capital
Share premium
Capital redemption reserve
Treasury reserve
Merger reserve
Retained earnings

Equity attributable to the owners of the parent

Total equity

Total equity and liabilities

Note

11
12
13
18

14
15

16
19
13

17
18
19
13

20
20

28

2020
£’000

2,358
17,209
118,499
722

138,788

18,207
4,804
358
82,282

105,651

244,439

–
81,169
125
24,167

105,461

137
–
1,084
112,253

113,474

218,935

38
16
15
(182)
25,511
106

25,504

25,504

2019
£’000

1,642
21,065
–
–

22,707

19,209
8,754
–
57,666

85,629

108,336

1,951
56,624
–
–

58,575

6,413
452
–
–

6,865

65,440

40
16
13
(91)
25,511
17,407

42,896

42,896

244,439

108,336

The notes on pages 89 to 105 are an integral part of these consolidated financial statements. 

The financial statements on pages 85 to 105 were approved by the Board and authorised for issue on 1 October 2020 and signed on its behalf by:

David Knight
Chief Executive Officer
ScS Group plc: Registered number 03263435

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity 
For the year ended 25 July 2020

Share
capital
£’000

Share
premium
£’000

Capital
redemption 
reserve
£’000

At 29 July 2018
Total comprehensive income
Share-based payments (note 22)
Treasury shares (note 28)
Dividend paid (note 21)

At 27 July 2019

At 28 July 2019
Impact of change in accounting policy (note 2)
Tax impact of change in accounting policy (note 2)

At 28 July 2019 (restated)

Total comprehensive loss
Share-based payment credit (note 22)
Purchase of own shares
Treasury shares (note 28)
Cancellation of repurchased shares
Dividend paid (note 21)

At 25 July 2020

40
–
–
–
–

40

40
–
–

40

–
–
–
–
(2)
–

38

Merger
reserve
£’000

25,511
–
–
–
–

25,511

25,511
–
–

25,511

–
–
–
–
–
–

Treasury 
reserve
£’000

(268)
–
–
177
–

(91)

(91)
–
–

(91)

–
–
–
(91)
–
–

Retained 
earnings
£’000

11,990
11,376
765
(177)
(6,547)

Total
equity
£’000

37,302
11,376
765
–
(6,547)

17,407

42,896

17,407
(5,826)
990

42,896
(5,826)
990

12,571

38,060

(2,223)
(818)
(4,425)
(663)
–
(4,336)

(2,223)
(818)
(4,425)
(754)
–
(4,336)

16
–
–
–
–

16

16
–
–

16

–
–
–
–
–
–

13
–
–
–
–

13

13
–
–

13

–
–
–
–
2
–

16

15

25,511

(182)

106

25,504

87

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSConsolidated Statement of Cash Flows 
For the year ended 25 July 2020

Cash flows from operating activities
(Loss)/profit before taxation
Adjustments for:
Loss from discontinued operations before tax
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
Depreciation – right-of-use assets
Amortisation of intangible assets
Impairment on non-current assets
Share-based payment (credit)/charge
Finance costs
Finance income

Changes in working capital:
Decrease in inventories
Decrease/(increase) in trade and other receivables
Increase in trade and other payables

Cash generated from operating activities
Interest paid
Income taxes paid

Net cash flow generated from operating activities

Cash flows used in investing activities
Purchase of property, plant and equipment
Payments to acquire intangible assets
Interest received

88

Net cash flow used in investing activities

Cash flows used in financing activities
Dividends paid 
Purchase of own shares 
Interest paid on lease liabilities 
Payment of capital element of leases
Proceeds from bank loan
Repayment of borrowings

Net cash flow used in financing activities

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

Note

2020
£’000

2019
£’000

(3,121)

14,260

31
12
13
11
5
22
7
8

14
15

7

8

21
28

–
4,847
22,787
647
3,376
(818)
4,195
(355)

31,558

1,002
191
26,715

59,466
(215)
(1,595)

57,656

(2,694)
(1,151)
355

(3,490)

(4,336)
(5,180)
(3,980)
(16,054)
12,000
(12,000)

(29,550)

24,616
57,666

82,282

(5)
4,824
–
676
–
765
96
(417)

20,199

2,656
(220)
1,486

24,121
(96)
(2,774)

21,251

(4,377)
(1,240)
417

(5,200)

(6,547)
–
–
–
–
–

(6,547)

9,504
48,162

57,666

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements

1.  General information 
ScS Group plc (the ‘Company’) is a public limited company, which is listed on the London Stock Exchange, incorporated and domiciled in England,  
within the UK (Company registration number 03263435). The address of the registered office is 45-49 Villiers Street, Sunderland, SR1 1HA. 

The Company’s principal activity is to act as a holding company for its subsidiaries. The Company and its subsidiaries’ (the ‘Group’s’) principal activity  
is the provision of furniture and flooring, trading under the name ScS.

2.  Accounting policies 
Basis of preparation
The Group’s financial statements have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the European Union 
(IFRS) as they apply to the financial statements of the Group for the year ended 25 July 2020 and applied in accordance with the Companies Act 2006  
as applicable to companies using IFRS and interpretations issued by the IFRS Interpretations Committee (IFRS IC) and under the historic cost convention. 
The accounting policies which follow set out those policies which apply in preparing the financial statements for the year ended 25 July 2020. These policies 
have been consistently applied to all of the years presented, unless otherwise stated.

The Group financial statements are presented in Sterling and all values are rounded to the nearest thousand pounds (£’000) except when otherwise indicated.

Going concern
At the time of approving the financial statements, the Board is required to formally assess that the business has adequate resources to continue  
in operational existence for the foreseeable future and as such can continue to adopt the ‘going concern’ basis of accounting. 

Liquidity
The most significant factor in considering whether current resources are adequate is to consider the Group’s liquidity. At 25 July 2020, the Group’s 
cash balance totalled £82.3m, and £20.6m was owed as trade payables for goods delivered. The Group has no drawn down debt, and further liquidity is 
available through the £20.0m CLBILS revolving credit facility (RCF) granted on 25 August 2020. This facility is committed for a term of 36 months and 
would be renegotiated well in advance of this maturity date. The RCF is subject to certain covenants in respect of fixed charge cover, liquidity, leverage 
and capital spending.

Cash flows
As part of the Group’s ongoing review of going concern, management have modelled cash flow forecasts to July 2023. The cash flow forecasts for  
that period include assumptions in relation to customer demand, the availability of product and the estimated continued impact of COVID-19 on the 
Group’s performance. 

89

Whilst the Group believes its initial cash flow forecasts are cautious, and current trading has exceeded those forecasts, the Group also recognises that 
there is considerable uncertainty as to the continued impacts of COVID-19. Whilst it is difficult to estimate the impact COVID-19 might have on the 
business, management have considered a further severe but plausible downside sensitivity scenario. The downside scenario includes the assumption 
that the Group’s stores and distribution network are forced to close for a further eight weeks, including across the crucial pre-Christmas trading period, 
followed by a period of gradual recovery, only returning to normal levels by July 2021. The scenario does not include any pent-up demand increase, 
despite the order increase experienced following the first lockdown period. 

The Group has included within the downside scenario associated reductions in marketing, capital spend, management and staff bonus costs and sales-
related commission payments. The government provided an 80% grant under the Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme (CJRS) as support for furloughed 
workers, which currently ends in October 2020. Further government support was provided through VAT and PAYE/NI deferrals and a 12-month business 
rates holiday for all retail businesses until March 2021. The Group also obtained further benefits through working with landlords for rent deferments.  
No additional government or landlord support has been included in the modelled downside scenario. 

Throughout this ‘severe but plausible downside’ scenario, the Group would have significant cash headroom, with the cash low point at the end of July 2021 
being substantial, before use of the £20m RCF. Furthermore, forecasts show sufficient headroom on all of the financial covenants and no requirement for 
any additional sources of financing (including any drawdown on the RCF).

Many of our large suppliers operate using credit insurance, which they use to support their payment terms with the Group. As these credit insurers are 
consistently reviewing their support for the companies involved, and a severe economic climate could mean that they withdraw their support for the 
Group, which could create working capital challenges for our suppliers, requiring them to request earlier payment dates. The Group has modelled the 
impact of the full withdrawal of this insurance, and noted that the cash headroom available ensures this does not pose a further risk to the Group’s going 
concern basis.

For the reasons set out in detail above, the Board believe that it remains appropriate to prepare the Group financial statements on a going concern basis.

New standards, amendments and interpretations 
At the date of authorisation of these financial statements, new standards, amendments and interpretations which had been issued but were not yet 
mandatory are not expected to have a material impact on the consolidated financial statements.

The following standards and amendments were adopted in the current financial year, and further details of their impact on the Group financial 
statements are given in note 13:
 – IFRS 16 ‘Leases’, which has been applied using the modified retrospective transition approach
 – ‘COVID-19-Related Rent Concessions amendment to IFRS 16’

Other standards, interpretations and amendments effective in the current financial year have not had a material impact on the Group financial statements.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued

2.  Accounting policies continued
IFRS 16
IFRS 16 introduced a single, on-balance sheet accounting model for lessees. As a result, the Group, as a lessee, has recognised right-of-use assets 
representing its rights to use the underlying assets and lease liabilities representing its obligation to make lease payments. 

The Group has applied IFRS 16 using the modified retrospective transition approach, with recognition of the initial right-of-use asset values being equal to 
the present value of the remaining lease payments, discounted at the Group’s incremental borrowing rate at 28 July 2019. Accordingly, the comparative 
information presented for 2019 has not been restated.

Previously, the Group determined at the inception of a contract whether an arrangement was or contained a lease under IFRIC 4 Determining Whether an 
Arrangement Contains a Lease. The Group now assesses whether a contact is, or contains, a lease based on the new definition of a lease. Under IFRS 16, 
a contract is, or contains, a lease if the contract conveys a right to control the use of an identified asset for a period of time in exchange for consideration.

On transition to IFRS 16, the Group elected to apply the practical expedient allowing the standard to be applied only to contracts that were previously 
identified as leases under IAS 17 and IFRIC 4. Therefore, the definition of a lease under IFRS 16 has been applied only to contracts entered into or changed 
on or after 28 July 2019.

IFRS 16 provides for certain optional practical expedients, including those related to the initial adoption of the standard. In applying IFRS 16 for the first 
time the Group also elected to use the recognition exemptions for lease contracts that, at the commencement date, have a lease term of 12 months  
or less and do not contain a purchase option, and lease contracts for which the underlying asset is of low value (‘low-value assets’).

For leases of properties in which the Group is a lessee, it has applied the practical expedient permitted by IFRS 16 and will account for each lease 
component and any associated non-lease components as a single lease component.

The impact on the balance sheet on transition is summarised below:

90

Property, plant and equipment
Right-of-use assets 
Deferred tax asset
Lease liabilities 
Prepayments 
Accruals 
Retained earnings

28 July 2019 
£’000

(480)
126,287
990
(134,857)
(3,760)
6,985
4,836

The net impact on retained earnings at 28 July 2019 was a decrease of £4,836,000. This arose as a result of an initial impairment of both the right-of-use 
assets and property, plant and equipment of £6,340,000, offset by a reversal in the previous onerous lease provisions relating to the same leases  
of £514,000 and the recognition of a net increase in deferred tax assets of £990,000. This impairment arose principally as a result of measurement 
differences between provisioning under IAS 36 compared with IAS 37. The weighted average incremental borrowing rate applied to the lease liabilities  
on 28 July 2019 was 2.9%.

The table below shows a reconciliation from the total operating lease commitment as disclosed at 27 July 2019 to the total lease liabilities recognised  
in the accounts immediately after transition:

Operating lease commitments disclosed as at 27 July 2019 
Discounted using the incremental borrowing rate at the date of initial application

Total lease liabilities recognised at 28 July 2019

The Group presents lease liabilities separately in the consolidated balance sheet.

The required disclosures under IAS 17 for these operating leases for the prior year are shown below:

Group
Within one year
Within two to five years
After five years

28 July 2019
£’000

149,960
(15,103)

134,857

Land and buildings Plant and machinery

Total

Year ended
27 July 2019
£’000

Year ended 
27 July 2019
£’000

Year ended 
27 July 2019
£’000

23,872
76,661
46,175

146,708

1,458
1,794
–

3,252

25,330
78,455
46,175

149,960

Basis of consolidation 
The Group financial statements consolidate the financial statements of ScS Group plc and the entities it controls (its subsidiaries) drawn up to within 
seven days of 31 July each year.

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020 
2.  Accounting policies continued
Subsidiaries 
Subsidiaries are entities controlled by the Company. Control exists when the Company has the power, directly or indirectly, to govern the financial 
and operating policies of an entity so as to obtain benefits from its activities. In assessing control, potential voting rights that presently are exercisable 
or convertible are taken into account. Control is generally accompanied by a shareholding of more than one-half of the voting rights. The financial 
information of subsidiaries is included in the consolidated financial information from the date that control commences until the date that control ceases.

Transactions eliminated on consolidation 
Intra-Group balances, and any gains and losses or income and expenses arising from intra-Group transactions, are eliminated in preparing the 
consolidated financial information. Gains arising from transactions with jointly controlled entities are eliminated to the extent of the Group’s interest  
in the entity. Losses are eliminated in the same way as gains, but only to the extent that there is no evidence of impairment. 

Exceptional items 
Exceptional items are defined as items of income and expenditure which are material and unusual in nature and which are considered to be of such 
significance that they require separate disclosure on the face of the income statement. Any future movements on items previously classified as 
exceptional will also be classified as exceptional.

Gross sales and revenue
For the purposes of managing its business the Group focuses on gross sales, which is defined as the fair value of the consideration received or  
receivable, prior to any accounting adjustments for interest-free credit fees or aftercare product costs. The Board of Directors believe gross sales is 
a more transparent measure of the activity levels and performance of its stores and online channels as it is not affected by customer preferences on 
payment options. Accordingly, gross sales is presented in this Annual Report, in addition to statutory revenue, as an alternative performance measure, 
with a reconciliation between the two measures provided in note 3 to the financial statements.

Both gross sales and revenue are stated net of discounts, returns and value added taxes, and are recognised when the Group has satisfied its 
performance obligations by transferring control of the goods or service to the customer, and the revenue and costs in respect of the transaction can 
be measured reliably and collectability is reasonably assured. This is deemed to be when the goods and any associated warranty contracts have been 
delivered to the customer. Warranty services, once sold, are subsequently provided by third parties. Revenue is measured net of the charges associated 
with interest-free credit sales.

91

The Group operates a negative working capital model whereby customers pay a deposit at the point of order and, unless the order is to be financed using 
consumer credit, settle outstanding balances before delivery. Payment of part of the consideration is often therefore taken before the Group has fulfilled 
its performance obligation. These deposits taken from customers are referred to as contract liabilities under IFRS 15, and are presented as payments 
received on account within current liabilities, until the goods or services are delivered. A very small number of deposits are refunded without delivery of 
product, and therefore materially, the value of customer deposits will be realised within 12 months. Where the outstanding balance is settled subsequent 
to the delivery of goods via consumer credit, the full financed balance is received within two working days of delivery from our third-party finance 
providers, who are then responsible for collecting subsequent payments from the customer. There has been no significant changes to the methodology 
in recognising contract liabilities in the current year.

The Group holds a sales return provision in the Consolidated Statement of Financial Position to provide for expected levels of returns on sales made 
before year end. The Group recognises the expected value of revenue relating to returns within sales.

Segmental reporting
As noted in the gross sales and revenue note above, segments are reported in a manner consistent with the internal reporting to the Board of Directors 
(see note 3 – Segment information on page 94).

Intangible assets
Intangible assets purchased separately are capitalised at cost and amortised on a straight-line basis over their useful economic life. The useful economic 
lives used are as follows:

Computer software 

20-33% straight-line per annum

The carrying value of intangible assets is reviewed for impairment when events or changes in circumstances indicate the carrying value may not be recoverable.

Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment are stated at historic purchase cost less accumulated depreciation and accumulated impairment losses. Cost includes the 
original purchase price of the asset and the costs attributable to bringing the asset to its working condition for its intended use. Depreciation is provided 
on all tangible fixed assets, at rates calculated to write off the cost, less estimated residual value, of the tangible fixed assets over their anticipated useful 
lives at the rates shown below:

Fixtures and fittings 
Computer equipment 
Leasehold improvements 
Freehold buildings 

10-20% straight-line per annum
20-33% straight-line per annum
The shorter of the term of the lease or 2% straight-line per annum
2% straight-line per annum

The carrying values of property, plant and equipment are reviewed for impairment when events or changes in circumstances indicate the carrying value 
may not be recoverable.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued

2.  Accounting policies continued
Leases
The Group assesses whether a contract is, or contains, a lease at inception of the contract. Typically, lease contracts relate to properties such as stores 
and distribution centres, and vehicles leases. For leases in which the Group is a lessee, the Group recognises a right-of-use asset and a lease liability.

Right-of-use assets
The Group recognises right-of-use assets at the commencement date of the lease. The right-of-use asset is initially measured at cost, which includes the 
amount of lease liabilities recognised, adjusted for any lease payments made at or before the commencement date, less any lease incentives received. 

The right-of-use asset is subsequently depreciated using the straight-line method over the shorter of the asset’s useful life or the lease term. 
Depreciation on right-of-use assets is included in administrative costs in the consolidated income statement. The right of use asset is tested for 
impairment if there are any indicators of impairment.

Lease liabilities 
At the commencement date of the lease, the Group recognises lease liabilities measured at the present value of the lease payments to be made over 
the lease term. Lease payments include: fixed payments less any lease incentives receivable; variable lease payments that depend on an index or rate; 
amounts expected to be payable by the lessee under residual value guarantees; and the cost of exercise of a purchase option if the lessee is reasonably 
certain to exercise that option. 

Any variable lease payments that do not depend on an index or rate are recognised as an expense in the period in which the event or condition that 
triggers the payment occurs. 

Where the lease contains an extension option or a termination option which is exercisable by the Group, as lessee, an assessment is made as to whether 
the Group is reasonably certain to exercise the extension option, or not exercise the termination option, considering all relevant facts and circumstances.

In calculating the present value of lease payments, the Group uses its incremental borrowing rate unless the interest rate implicit in the lease can be
readily determined. 

92

After the commencement date, the lease liability is increased to reflect the accretion of interest and reduced for lease payments made. In addition, the 
carrying amount of lease liabilities is remeasured if there is a modification, a change in the lease term or a change in the fixed lease payments. Interest 
charges are included in finance costs in the consolidated income statement.

Inventories
Inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value and consist of finished goods held for resale. Where necessary, provision is made for 
obsolete, slow-moving and defective stocks. Cost comprises the purchase price of goods and other directly attributable costs incurred in bringing the 
product to its present location and condition. Net realisable value is the estimated selling price less any further costs to be incurred to disposal.

Trade receivables
Trade receivables are amounts due from customers for goods sold or services performed in the ordinary course of business. If collection is expected in one 
year or less (or in the normal operating cycle of the business if longer), they are classified as current assets. If not, they are presented as non-current assets.

Trade receivables are recognised initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method, less provision 
for impairment. As a requirement of applying IFRS 9, the Group has applied an expected credit loss (ECL) model when calculating impairment losses on its 
trade and other receivables. The majority of the trade receivables are due from finance houses with which there is a very low likelihood, and no previous 
history, of default, and therefore there has been no material impact of the ECL model.

Trade payables
Trade payables are obligations to pay for goods or services that have been acquired in the ordinary course of business from suppliers. Accounts payable 
are classified as current liabilities if payment is due within one year or less. If not, they are presented as non-current liabilities.

Trade payables are recognised initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method.

Borrowings
Borrowings are recognised initially at fair value, net of transaction costs incurred. Borrowings are subsequently carried at amortised cost; any difference 
between the proceeds (net of transaction costs) and the redemption value is recognised in the income statement over the period of the borrowings 
using the effective interest method.

Cash and cash equivalents
For the purpose of presentation in the statement of cash flows, cash and cash equivalents includes cash on hand.

Government grants
Included in administrative expenses is income of £5.0m that was received under the UK Government’s Job Retention Scheme which has been paid to 
employees on furlough. There are no unfulfilled conditions or other contingences attaching to this grant. The Group did not benefit directly from any 
other forms of government assistance.

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 20202.  Accounting policies continued
Treasury shares
The Employee Benefit Trust (EBT) provides for the issue of shares to Group employees, principally under share option schemes. Shares in the 
Company held by the EBT are included in the balance sheet as treasury shares at cost, including any directly attributable incremental costs. Subsequent 
consideration received for the sale of such shares is also recognised in equity, with any difference between the sale proceeds and the original cost being 
taken to retained earnings. No gain or loss is recognised in the financial statements on transactions in treasury shares. 

The number of such shares is also deducted from the number of shares in issue when calculating the earnings per share. 

Share capital
Ordinary shares are classified as equity.

Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of new ordinary shares or options are shown in equity as a deduction, net of tax, from the proceeds.

Pre-opening and launch costs
Pre-opening and launch costs are charged to the income statement in the year they are incurred.

Advertising expenditure
All routine and general advertising costs are expensed as incurred. Advertising costs paid to media companies are recognised as a prepayment until  
the advertising is placed in the media and communicated to the public, at which point the expenditure is expensed to the income statement.

Supplier contributions
Contributions received from suppliers towards the cost of displaying and promoting their product are recognised as a reduction in the advertising and 
marketing costs to which they relate.

Supplier rebates
Rebates receivable from suppliers are based upon the volume of business with each supplier and are recognised in the income statement in cost of sales 
or credited to stock as appropriate on an earned basis, by reference to the supplier revenue.

Pension costs
Contributions to the defined contribution scheme are charged to the income statement in the year in which they become payable. The assets of the 
scheme are held separately from those of the Group in an independently administered fund.

93

Taxation
Tax on the profit or loss for the year comprises current and deferred tax. Tax is recognised in the income statement except to the extent that it relates  
to a business combination, or items recognised directly in equity or other comprehensive income. 

Current tax is the expected tax payable or receivable on the taxable income or loss for the year, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the 
balance sheet date, and any adjustment to tax payable in respect of previous years.

Deferred tax is recognised using the liability method, on temporary differences at the balance sheet date between the tax base of assets and liabilities 
and their carrying amounts for financial reporting purposes, to the extent that the Directors consider that it is more likely than not that there will be 
suitable taxable profits from which the future reversal of the underlying timing differences can be deducted.

Deferred tax is measured on an undiscounted basis at the average tax rates that are expected to apply in the periods in which timing differences reverse, 
based on tax rates and laws enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset when there is a legally enforceable right to set off current tax assets against current tax liabilities and when 
they relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation authority and the Group intends to settle its current tax assets and liabilities on a net basis.

Foreign currency
Transactions in foreign currencies are translated at the rate ruling at the date of the transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign 
currencies are translated at the rate of exchange ruling at the balance sheet date. All exchange differences are taken to the income statement in the 
period in which they arise.

Share-based payments
The Company operates an equity-settled, share-based payment plan for Directors of the trading subsidiary undertaking, A. Share & Sons Limited, which 
includes the Executive Directors of the Group. The fair value of the Directors’ services received by the Group in exchange for the issue of shares in the 
Company is recognised as an expense in the financial statements of the subsidiary company to which services have been supplied. The total amount to 
be expensed over the vesting period is determined by reference to the fair value of the shares issued, excluding the impact of any non-market vesting 
conditions (for example, profitability and sales growth targets). Non-market vesting conditions are included in assumptions about the number of shares 
that are expected to vest. At each balance sheet date, the Group revises its estimates of the number of shares that are expected to vest. It recognises  
the impact of the revision to original estimates, if any, in the income statement, with a corresponding adjustment to equity.

Provisions
Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present obligation as a result of a past event, it is probable that a transfer of economic benefits will be 
required to settle the obligation, and a reliable estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued

2.  Accounting policies continued
Critical accounting judgements and estimates
The preparation of the financial statements requires judgements, estimates and assumptions to be made that affect the reported value of assets, 
liabilities, revenues and expenses. The nature of estimation and judgement means that actual outcomes could differ from expectation. 

Critical accounting estimates and assumptions
Management consider that accounting estimates and assumptions made in relation to the following items have a significant risk of resulting in a material 
adjustment to the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities within the next financial period.

Stock provisions
The Group holds £18.2m of inventory at the year end, and the majority of this stock is held for display in store. Due to the nature of this stock, it will often 
be subject to the wear and tear associated with use in a showroom environment, and some items may have also been in store for an extended period  
of time. As such, this stock is often unable to achieve the same margin as the ‘special order’ stock purchased and delivered directly to our customers,  
and may occasionally be sold at a level lower than cost following a business decision to refresh the range or better utilise the space. The Group’s policy  
in relation to stock provisioning is therefore to provide for obsolete, slow-moving and defective stock, and therefore ensure that stock is held at the most 
appropriate estimate of net realisable value. 

In determining an estimate of this value, management has made judgements in respect of the quality of the Group’s products and saleability, and  
applied a provision based on historic sales levels. Whilst management considers that the methodologies and assumptions adopted in the valuation  
are supportable, reasonable and robust, because of the inherent uncertainty of the sale price of stock currently held, those estimated values may  
differ from the final sale and the total differences could potentially be significant.

94

Impairment of property, plant and equipment and right-of-use assets
Management consider each store to be a cash-generating unit (CGU). At each balance sheet date, the Group reviews the carrying amounts of it’s 
property, plant and equipment and right-of-use assets and intangible assets to determine whether there is any indication of impairment at a store 
following poor performance. If any such indication exists, the recoverable amount of the asset is estimated in order to determine the extent of the 
impairment loss, if any. Recoverable amounts for CGUs are the higher of fair value less costs of disposal, and value in use. Value in use is calculated from 
cash flow projections based on the Group’s internal budgets, which are then extrapolated over the remaining store lease length, and management’s 
expectations of estimated growth rates. The key estimates for the value in use calculations are those regarding the discount rate used and expected 
changes to future cash flows. Management sets the budgets based on past experiences and expectations of future changes in the market and estimates 
discount rate using pre-tax rates that reflect the current market assessment of the time value of money and the risks specific to the CGUs, deriving  
from the Group’s post-tax weighted average cost of capital. If the recoverable amount of an asset or CGU is estimated to be less than its carrying amount, 
the carrying amount of the asset or CGU is reduced to its recoverable amount. An impairment loss is recognised as an expense immediately. Where  
an impairment loss subsequently reverses, the carrying amount of the asset or CGU is increased to the revised estimate of its recoverable amount,  
but so that the increased carrying amount does not exceed the carrying amount that would have been determined had no impairment loss been 
recognised for the asset or CGU in prior years. A reversal of an impairment loss is recognised as income immediately.

Discount rates utilised within IFRS 16 accounting
In calculating the present value of lease payments, the Group uses its incremental borrowing rate at the lease commencement date if the interest 
rate implicit in the lease is not readily determinable. Generally the Group uses its incremental borrowing rate as the discount rate. As it has no external 
borrowings management are required to determine an approximation, calculated based on UK Government Gilt rates of an appropriate duration and 
adjusted by an indicative credit premium. 

Critical judgements in applying the Group’s accounting policies
Going concern
After considering the forecasts, sensitivities and mitigating actions available to management and having regard to the risks and uncertainties to which 
the Group is exposed, management have a reasonable expectation that the Group has adequate resources to continue in operational existence for the 
foreseeable future, and operate for a period of at least 12 months from the date of signing the financial statements. Accordingly, the financial statements 
continue to be prepared on the going concern basis.

3.  Segment information
The Directors have determined the operating segments based on the operating reports reviewed by the senior management team (the Executive 
Directors and the other Directors of the trading subsidiary, A. Share & Sons Limited) that are used to assess both performance and strategic decisions. 
The Directors have identified that the senior management team are the chief operating decision makers in accordance with the requirements of IFRS 8 
‘Segmental reporting’.

The Directors consider that the Group operates one type of business generating gross sales and revenue from the retail of furniture and flooring.  
All gross sales and revenue profit before taxation, assets and liabilities are attributable to the principal activity of the Group and other related services.  
All gross sales and revenues are generated in the United Kingdom.

An analysis of gross sales is as follows:

Sale of goods
Associated sale of warranties

Gross sales
Less: costs of interest-free credit

Revenue

Year ended
25 July 2020
£’000

Year ended
27 July 2019
£’000

249,578
18,541

268,119
(12,628)

255,491

309,932
23,335

333,267
(15,861)

317,406

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 20204.  Operating profit
Operating profit is stated after charging:

Fees payable to the Company auditors for the audit of Company and consolidated financial statements
Fees paid for other services: 
– audit of the Company’s subsidiaries 
– other non-audit services
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment – owned
Depreciation of right-of-use assets
Amortisation of intangible assets 
Impairment of property, plant and equipment and right-of-use assets 
Operating lease rentals – plant and machinery
Operating lease rentals – land and buildings
COVID-19 related rent concessions
Government support

Year ended
25 July 2020
£’000

25

Year ended
27 July 2019
£’000

25

97
15
4,847
22,787
647
3,376
–
–
(615)
8,420

103
15
4,824
–
676
–
2,198
24,400
–
–

During the year the Group received support from the UK government of £8.4m in response to the COVID-19 outbreak. This included £5.0m under the 
UK Government’s Job Retention Scheme which has been paid to employees on furlough. This has been recognised as a grant in accordance with the 
accounting policy set out in Note 2.

5. Exceptional items
In order to provide a clearer understanding of underlying profitability, underlying operating profit excludes exceptional items, which relate to costs that, 
either by their size or nature, require separate disclosure in order to give a fuller understanding of the Group’s financial performance. Exceptional items, 
booked to operating costs, comprised the following:

Year ended
25 July 2020
£’000

Year ended
27 July 2019
£’000

Impairment charges associated with stores
Restructuring costs
Professional fees

3,376
613
–

3,989

95

–
–
352

352

Impairment charges associated with stores
As a result of COVID-19 a revision in future projections for the business has resulted in an impairment charge of £3,376,000 being recognised on 
the assets associated with a number of our stores. This has been split between the right-of-use asset (£2,619,000) and tangible assets (£757,000), 
apportioned based on net book value. 

Management have considered the potential impact of changes in assumptions on the impairment recorded against the Group’s network of store cash-
generating units, While there is not a significant risk of an adjustment to the carrying amount of any one store cash-generating unit that would be material
to the Group as a whole in the next financial year, management have considered sensitivities to the impairment charge as a result of changes to the 
post-tax discount rate. The discount rate used in management’s calculation was 8.5%. The sensitivities applied are an increase or decrease of 1.0% used 
to determine the impairment charge. It is estimated that a 1.0% decrease/increase in discount rate assumptions, with no change to forecast revenue 
assumptions, would result in a £667,000 increase/£599,000 decrease in the impairment charge of store assets in the 52 weeks to 25 July 2020.

Restructuring costs
Current year exceptional items include £613,000 in relation to amounts payable for loss of office incurred as a result of restructuring, in particular, relating 
to the centralisation of administrative support from each of our individual stores to our head office in Sunderland.

Professional fees
In the prior year, exceptional costs disclosed within continuing operations related to the unrealised acquisition of sofa.com. As announced in January 
2019, the Group was in discussions regarding the potential acquisition of the business and assets of Sofa.com Limited. Ultimately, this transaction did  
not occur and the professional fees relating to the due diligence conducted were therefore deemed to be exceptional.

6.  Employees and Directors
6.1 Staff costs
The aggregate remuneration of all employees including Directors comprises:

Wages and salaries
Social security costs
Other pension costs
Share-based payment (credit)/charge (note 22)

Discontinued operations (note 31)

Total

Year ended
25 July 2020
£’000

Year ended
27 July 2019
£’000

47,281
4,532
1,235
(818)

52,230

–

52,230

52,037
5,087
1,172
765

59,061

1,247

60,308

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued

6.  Employees and Directors continued
The average monthly number of employees (including Executive Directors) during the year was as follows:

Sales
Office and managerial
Services and warehousing
Cleaning

Discontinued operations

Total

Year ended
25 July 2020

Year ended
27 July 2019

681
525
466
35

1,707
–

1,707

620
680
451
33

1,784
45

1,829

Details of Directors’ remuneration, share options, long-term incentive schemes and pension entitlements are disclosed in the Remuneration Report  
on pages 62 to 68.

6.2 Key management compensation
Key management comprises the Directors of the trading subsidiary, A. Share & Sons Limited and the Group Directors and excludes the Non-Executive 
Directors.

The key management compensation is as follows:

Short-term employee benefits
Deferred contribution pension cost
Share-based payment (credit)/charge

Year ended
25 July 2020
£’000

Year ended
27 July 2019
£’000

1,349
209
(818)

2,857
240
765

96

These have been disclosed in the Remuneration Report along with details of shares exercised by the highest paid Director. 

The share-based payment credit in the year of £818,000 relates to the unwinding of expenses previously recognised due to EPS for the Group falling 
below the minimum performance conditions.

7.  Finance costs

Bank facility non-utilisation fees
Bank facility renewal fees
Bank facility utilisation fees
Interest on lease liability

8.  Finance income

Bank interest received

9.  Taxation
(a) Analysis of tax (credit)/charge in the year

Current tax:
UK corporation tax on profits for the year
Adjustments in respect of prior years

Total current tax (credit)/charge

Deferred tax:
Origination and reversal of temporary differences 
Adjustments in respect of prior years

Total deferred tax (credit)/charge (note 18)

Income tax (credit)/charge in the statement of comprehensive income

Year ended
25 July 2020
£’000

Year ended
27 July 2019
£’000

63
55
97
3,980

4,195

96
–
–
–

96

Year ended
25 July 2020
£’000

355

Year ended
27 July 2019
£’000

417

Year ended
25 July 2020
£’000

Year ended
27 July 2019
£’000

(459)
(255)

(714)

(284)
100

(184)

(898)

3,299
(226)

3,073

(244)
51

(193)

2,880

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 20209.  Taxation continued
(b) Tax on discontinued operations

Tax credit on profit from ordinary activities of discontinued operations

Year ended
25 July 2020
£’000

Year ended
27 July 2019
£’000

–

(1)

(c) Factors affecting tax credit/charge for the year
The tax credit (2019: charge) assessed on the loss(2019: profit) for the year is higher (2019: higher) than the standard rate of corporation tax in the UK  
of 19.00% (2019: 19.00%). The differences are explained below:

Continuing (loss) profit before taxation

Profit before tax at 19.00% (2019: 19.00%)
Effects of:
Other expenses not deductible 
Deduction on exercise of share options
Depreciation not eligible for tax purposes
Adjustments in respect of prior years
Impact of changes in tax rates

Income tax (credit)/charge in the statement of comprehensive income

Year ended
25 July 2020
£’000

(3,121)

(593)

Year ended
27 July 2019
£’000

14,260

2,709

(146)
(112)
161
(155)
(53)

(898)

204
(5)
111
(175)
36

2,880

(d) Factors that may affect future tax charges
The Chancellor confirmed in the March 2020 budget that the rate of corporation tax will remain at 19% from 1 April 2020, and consequently deferred  
tax at 25 July 2020 has been calculated based on the rate of 19%. 

10.  (Loss)/earnings per share

a) Basic (loss)/earnings per share attributable to the ordinary equity holders of the Company
From underlying continuing operations
From underlying discontinued operation
Total basic earnings per share from underlying operations

From exceptional costs

Total basic (loss)/earnings per share

b) Diluted (loss)/earnings per share attributable to the ordinary equity holders of the Company
From underlying continuing operations
From underlying discontinued operation

Total diluted earnings per share from underlying operations
From exceptional costs
Total diluted (loss)/earnings per share

c) Reconciliations of earnings used in calculating (loss)/earnings per share
(Loss)/profit from continuing operations
– Add back exceptional costs net of tax

Profit from underlying continuing operations
Loss from discontinued operation
– Add back exceptional costs net of tax

Profit from underlying discontinued operations
Total profits from underlying operations

Total (loss)/profit from operations

d) Weighted average number of shares used as the denominator
Weighted average number of shares in issue for the purposes of basic (loss)/earnings per share
Effect of dilutive potential ordinary shares:
– Share options

Weighted average number of ordinary shares for the purpose of diluted (loss)/earnings per share

Year ended
25 July 2020
pence

Year ended
27 July 2019
pence

97

2.6p
–p
2.6p

(8.4p)

(5.8p)

2.6p
– p

2.6p
(8.4p)
(5.8p)

29.4p
0.9p
30.3p

(1.8p)

28.5p

28.3p
0.8p

29.1p
(1.7p)
27.4p

Year ended
25 July 2020
£’000

Year ended
27 July 2019
£’000

(2,223)
3,231

1,008
–
–

–
1,008

(2,223)

11,380
352

11,732
(4)
359

355
12,087

11,376

Year ended
25 July 2020

Year ended
27 July 2019

38,464,470

39,934,853

1,598,815

1,563,000

40,063,285

41,497,853

A total of 1,598,815 potential ordinary shares have not been included within the calculation of diluted (loss)/earnings per share as at 25 July 2020 as they 
are antidilutive.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued

11.  Intangible assets

Cost 
At 28 July 2019
Additions

At 25 July 2020

Accumulated amortisation
At 28 July 2019
Charge for the year

At 25 July 2020

Net book amount
At 25 July 2020

At 27 July 2019

Cost 
At 29 July 2018
Additions

At 27 July 2019

98

Accumulated amortisation
At 29 July 2018
Charge for the year

At 27 July 2019

Net book amount
At 27 July 2019

At 28 July 2018

Amortisation is charged through the administration expenses line.

12.  Property, plant and equipment

Cost 
At 28 July 2019
Additions
At 25 July 2020

Accumulated depreciation and impairment
At 28 July 2019
Opening IFRS 16 impairment adjustment
Charge for the year
Impairment

At 25 July 2020

Net book amount
At 25 July 2020

At 27 July 2019

Cost 
At 29 July 2018
Additions

At 27 July 2019

Accumulated depreciation and impairment
At 29 July 2018
Charge for the year

At 27 July 2019

Net book amount
At 27 July 2019

At 28 July 2018

Freehold land
and buildings
£’000

Leasehold
improvements
£’000

Computer 
equipment
£’000

Fixtures and
fittings
£’000

159
–
159

94
1
3
1

99

60

65

159
–

159

91
3

94

65

68

53,704
369
54,073

38,326
284
2,806
455

41,871

12,202

15,378

51,871
1,833

53,704

35,038
3,288

38,326

15,378

16,833

4,357
307
4,664

3,260
24
654
37

3,975

689

1,097

3,691
666

4,357

2,787
473

3,260

1,097

904

31,085
1,552
32,637

26,560
171
1,384
264

28,379

4,258

4,525

29,145
1,940

31,085

25,500
1,060

26,560

4,525

3,645

25 July
2020
£’000

Computer
software

6,893
1,363

8,256

5,251
647

5,898

2,358

1,642

27 July
2019
£’000

Computer
software

5,726
1,167

6,893

4,575
676

5,251

1,642

1,151

Total
£’000

89,305
2,228
91,533

68,240
480
4,847
757

74,324

17,209

21,065

84,866
4,439

89,305

63,416
4,824

68,240

21,065

21,450

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 202012.  Property, plant and equipment continued
The net book value of leasehold improvements is as follows:

Short leaseholds (up to 25 years)
Long leaseholds (greater than 25 years)

Year ended
25 July 2020
£’000

12,144
58

12,202

Year ended
27 July 2019
£’000

15,313
65

15,378

From 28 July 2019 the Group adopted IFRS 16 ‘Leases’. Leased assets are now presented as a separate line item in the balance sheet. Refer to notes 2  
and 13 for the accounting policy and details about the changes in accounting policy, respectively. 

Impairment of property, plant and equipment
As a result of the impact of COVID-19 all stores have been tested for impairment as at the year end. The impairment review compared the value in  
use of each CGU based on the Group’s latest budget and forecast cash flows to the carrying values as at 25 July 2020. A charge of £757,000 relating  
to the impact of COVID-19, was recorded against property, plant and equipment and recognised as an exceptional item (see note 5).

As disclosed in the accounting policies (note 2), the cash flows used within the impairment model are based on assumptions which are sources  
of estimation uncertainty and small movements in these assumptions could lead to a further impairment. 

13. Leases
The Group leases both properties and motor vehicles.

As a lessee, the Group previously classified leases as an operating lease or finance lease based on its assessment of whether the lease transferred 
substantially all of the risks and rewards of ownership. Under IFRS 16, the Group recognises right-of-use assets and lease liabilities for most leases,  
except for short-term leases and leases of low-value assets.

Consolidated Statement of Financial Position
The Consolidated Statement of Financial Position as at 25 July 2020 shows the following amounts relating to leases. As IFRS 16 has not been applied 
retrospectively the balances alongside represent the equivalent balances at the start of the accounting period after restating for IFRS 16.

99

Right-of-use assets

Cost 
At 28 July 2019
Additions
Disposals
At 25 July 2020

Accumulated depreciation
At 28 July 2019
Charge for the year
Depreciation on disposals
Impairment (note 5)

At 25 July 2020

Net book amount
At 25 July 2020

Leasehold 
property
£’000

122,970
14,705
–
137,675

–
20,859
–
2,619

23,478

Motor vehicles
£’000

Total
£’000

3,317
2,913
(422)
5,808

–
1,928
(422)
–

1,506

126,287
17,618
(422)
143,483

–
22,787
(422)
2,619

24,984

114,197

4,302

118,499

Impairment of right-of-use assets
As a result of the impact of COVID-19, all stores have been tested for impairment as at the year end. The impairment review compared the value in use 
of each CGU based on the Group’s latest budget and forecast cash flows to the carrying values as at 25 July 2020. A charge of £2,619,000 relating to the 
impact of COVID-19, was recorded against the right-of-use asset and recognised as an exceptional item (see note 5) as it is considered to be material and 
one-off in nature. 

As disclosed in the accounting policies (note 2), the cash flows used within the impairment model are based on assumptions which are sources of 
estimation uncertainty and small movements in these assumptions could lead to a further impairment. 

Lease liabilities 
The following tables show the discounted lease liabilities included in the Group Consolidated Statement of Financial Position and a maturity analysis of the 
contractual undiscounted lease payments:

Current 
Non-current

Year ended  
25 July 2020
£’000

24,167
112,253

136,420

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued

13. Leases continued
Maturity analysis – contractual undiscounted lease payments:

Group
Within one year
Within two to five years
After five years

Total undiscounted lease payments

Year ended  
25 July 2020
£’000

28,010
81,366
41,132

150,508

The Group presents lease liabilities separately in the consolidated balance sheet.

Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income
The Group has recognised depreciation and interest costs in respect of leases that were previously classified as operating leases in the income 
statement for the year, rather than rental charges of £25,216,000. During the year, the Group recognised £22,787,000 of depreciation charges and 
£3,980,000 of interest costs in respect of these leases. Leases of low value assets and short-term leases of 12 months or less are expensed to the  
Group income statement.

The practical expedient for COVID-19-related rent concessions has been applied to all rent concessions that meet the specified conditions. This has 
resulted in negative variable lease payment of £615,000 being credited to the income statement. 

14.  Inventories

100

Finished goods

Year ended
25 July 2020
£’000

18,207

Year ended
27 July 2019
£’000

19,209

The cost of inventories before cash discounts and volume rebates, as an expense and included in cost of sales relating to continued operations 
amounted to £138,663,000 (2019: £171,290,000).

The charge for the year relating to inventories written off amounted to £640,000 (2019: £815,000).

15.  Trade and other receivables

Trade receivables
Other receivables
Prepayments

Year ended
25 July 2020
£’000

Year ended
27 July 2019
£’000

1,577
1,948
1,279

4,804

1,084
2,470
5,200

8,754

The fair value of trade and other receivables is approximate to their carrying value. Trade and other receivables are considered due once they have passed 
the contracted due date. 

The carrying amounts of trade and other receivables are all denominated in Sterling.

The majority of the trade receivables are due from third party finance providers with which there is a very low likelihood, and no previous history, of default, 
and therefore there has been no material impact of the Group’s expected credit loss model.

The bad debt provision is not considered material for disclosure.

16.  Trade and other payables – current

Trade payables
Payments received on account
Other taxation and social security payable
Accruals 

Year ended
25 July 2020
£’000

Year ended
27 July 2019
£’000

20,638
34,592
12,834
13,105

81,169

25,859
14,697
4,063
12,005

56,624

The fair value of financial liabilities approximates their carrying value due to short maturities. Financial liabilities are denominated in Sterling.
Payments received on account represent deposits taken from customers at the point of order and in advance of the Group fulfilling its performance 
obligations to provide goods and services for customer orders. They will be realised in the next 12 months. The brought forward balance of payments 
received on account was recognised as revenue during the year.

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 202017.  Trade and other payables – non-current

Lease incentives
Onerous lease provision
Accruals

Year ended
25 July 2020
£’000

Year ended
27 July 2019
£’000

–
–
137

137

5,899
514
–

6,413

In the prior year the onerous lease provision of £514,000 related to commitments on leases for stores identified as loss-making as part of management’s 
ongoing review of store profitability. In the current year under IFRS 16, this provision along with the lease incentives has been reclassified to offset against 
the right-of-use asset recognised at the transition date.

18.  Deferred tax
The Group’s movements in deferred taxation during the current financial year and previous year are as follows:

Opening deferred tax liability
Adjustment on initial application of IFRS 16

Opening deferred tax liability (restated)
Adjustments in respect of prior years
Credited to profit and loss account arising from the origination and reversal of temporary differences (note 9)

Closing deferred tax asset/(liability) 

Deferred taxation has been fully provided for in respect of: 

Accelerated capital allowances
Losses
Other timing differences
Capital gains held over
Adjustment on initial application of IFRS 16

Closing deferred tax asset/(liability)

19.  Provisions

At 28 July 2019
Reclassification from accruals

At 25 July 2020

Year ended
25 July 2020
£’000

Year ended
27 July 2019
£’000

(452)
990

538
(100)
284

722

(645)
–

(645)
–
193

(452)

Year ended
25 July 2020
£’000

Year ended
27 July 2019
£’000

101

(407)
284
43
(135)
937

722

Property 
obligations 
£’000

–
1,209

1,209

(497)
121
45
(121)
–

(452)

Total
£’000

–
1,209

1,209

Property provisions relate to obligations in respect of the Group’s property leases for an estimate of dilapidation and decommissioning costs payable 
upon exiting a leased property. These provisions are expected to be utilised at the end of each specific lease.

Current 
Non-current

20.  Called-up share capital

As at 27 July 2019
Shares repurchased and cancelled

As at 25 July 2020

Year ended  
25 July 2020
£’000

Year ended  
27 July 2019
£’000

125
1,084

1,209

Number of shares

Ordinary shares 
£’000

Share premium 
£’000

40,009,109
(1,996,454)

38,012,655

40
(2)

38

16
–

16

–
–

–

Total
£’000

56
(2)

54

Authorised, allotted and fully paid share capital is 38,012,655 of £0.001 each (2019: 40,009,109 of £0.001 each).

On 8 November 2019, the Group acquired 1,996,454 ordinary shares at a price of 220.0p per ordinary share from related party Parlour Product Holdings 
(LUX) S.A.R.L for a total consideration of £4,400,000. Following this purchase, the ordinary shares purchased by the Group were cancelled, and the 
Group’s issued share capital subsequently consists of 38,012,655 ordinary shares, each with one voting right.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
 
 
 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued

21.  Dividends
A final dividend for the year ended 27 July 2019 of 11.20p was paid on 27 November 2019. It has been recognised in shareholders’ equity in the year  
to 25 July 2020.

An interim dividend of 5.50p per ordinary share was declared by the Board of Directors on 20 March 2020. However, the Board did not feel it was 
appropriate to pay the interim dividend when receiving government support. A final dividend has not been proposed.

At 25 July 2020, the retained earnings of the Company amounted to £57,726,000.

22.  Share-based payments
The Group operates equity-settled share schemes for certain employees that are intended to act as a long-term incentive to help retain key employees 
and Directors who are considered important to the success of the business.

Post-admission incentive arrangements
The ScS Group plc Long-Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) was adopted on 21 January 2015 conditional upon admission. The LTIP allows for various types  
of awards and the following grants over shares in ScS Group plc have been made:
(i)  £Nil cost options conditional on the IPO taking place (approved on 21 January 2015).
(ii)  Market value options under an HMRC approved Company Share Option Plan conditional on the IPO taking place (approved on 21 January 2015).
(iii)  Unapproved market value options conditional on the IPO taking place (approved on 21 January 2015).
(iv) Performance-based £nil cost options granted on 30 March 2015 (the performance condition is based on EPS as set out in the consolidated audited 
financial statements of the Group for 2017). As the EPS for the Group was lower than the performance condition set, these awards have been 
forfeited as at 28 July 2018.

(v)  Performance-based £nil cost options granted on 17 October 2016 (the performance condition is based on EPS as set out in the consolidated audited 
financial statements of the Group for the financial year ended 27 July 2019). As the EPS for the Group was higher than the minimum performance 
condition set, a proportion of these options were awarded as at 25 July 2020.

(vi) Performance-based £nil cost options granted on 16 October 2017 (the performance condition is based on EPS as set out in the consolidated audited 

financial statements of the Group for the financial year ended 25 July 2020).

(vii) Performance-based £nil cost options granted on 15 October 2018 (the performance condition is based on EPS as set out in the consolidated audited 

102

financial statements of the Group for the financial year ended 31 July 2021).

(ix) Performance-based £nil cost options granted on 14 October 2019 (the performance condition is based on EPS as set out in the consolidated audited 

financial statements of the Group for the financial year ended 30 July 2022).

Fair value of awards
The awards granted have been valued using the Black-Scholes model. No performance conditions were included in the fair value calculations.

The expected life is the estimated time period to exercise. The expected volatility is calculated by reference to the historic volatility of the Company from 
the period between admission and the date of grant and historic volatilities of comparator companies measured over a period commensurate with the 
expected life. The dividend yield is based on the target dividend yield set at IPO (with the exception of awards that give an entitlement to receive dividend 
equivalents). The risk-free interest rate is the yield on UK government bonds of a term consistent with the expected life. The level of vesting is estimated 
at the balance sheet date and will be trued up until the vesting date. 

LTIP (pre-IPO nil cost options)

LTIP (CSOP market  
value options)

2018, 2019 and 2020 LTIP 
(Directors’ awards)

LTIP (all awards)

Share awards

exercise price Share awards

exercise price Share awards

exercise price  Share awards

Average 

Average 

Average 

Average 
exercise price

Outstanding as at 28 July 2018
Granted
Forfeited
Exercised
Expired

Outstanding as at 27 July 2019
Granted
Forfeited
Exercised
Outstanding as at 25 July 2020

Exercisable at 25 July 2020
Exercisable at 27 July 2019

–

139,997  £0.000001
–
(34,285) £0.000001
(82,855) £0.000001
–

–

22,857  £0.000001
–
–
– £0.000001
(22,857) £0.000001
–

–

–

–
22,857 £0.000001 

52,393 
–
(4,880)
–
–

47,513 
–
–
–
47,513 

47,513 
47,513 

£1.75
–
£1.75
–
–

£1.75
–
–
–
£1.75

£1.75 
£1.75 

1,028,266  £0.000001 1,220,656

672,848 £0.000001
(208,484) £0.000001
–
–

–
–

562,340 £0.000001
(258,226) £0.000001
(245,442) £0.000001
1,551,302  £0.000001

£0.08
672,848 £0.000001
(247,649)
£0.04
(82,855) £0.000001
–

–

£0.05
562,340 £0.000001
(258,226) £0.000001
(268,299) £0.000001
£0.05
1,598,815

1,492,630  £0.000001 1,563,000

– 
– 

– 
– 

47,513 
70,370 

£1.75 
£1.18 

Note: Weighted average share price for all LTIP awards during the year.

As at 25 July 2020, 554,141 of the outstanding LTIP share options relate to the 2020 LTIP, which vested as at the year end date. Due to the Group’s EPS 
being lower than the minimum target set, these options will lapse. Further information on the LTIP is available in the Directors’ Remuneration Report.

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 202022.  Share-based payments continued
The fair value of share options issued and the assumptions used in the calculation are as follows:

Grant date
Share price at grant date
Exercise price
Number of employees
Shares issued
Expected volatility
Expected life (years)
Risk-free interest rate
Expected dividend yield
Fair value per share
Actual/estimated vesting

2015

2015

2017

2018

2019

2020

21 January 
2015
£1.75
£nil 
25
571,421
33.7%
3
0.70%
8%
£1.38
100%

21 January 
2015
£1.75
£1.75
6
68,659
36.2%
5
1.06%
8%
£0.24
100%

17 October 
2016
£1.83
£nil
6
474,125
–1
3
–1
–1
£1.83
56%

16 October 
2017
£1.75
£nil
8
554,141
–1
3
–1
–1
£1.75
0%

15 October 
2018
£2.23
£nil
8
672,848
–1
3
–1
–1
£2.23
0%

14 October
2019
£2.36
£nil
7
562,340
–1
3
–1
–1
£2.36
0%

1.  LTIP participants are entitled to receive dividend equivalents on unvested awards, and therefore dividend yield does not impact the fair value calculation. Furthermore, volatility and 

risk-free rates do not impact the fair value calculation for awards with no exercise price or market-based performance conditions.

The total credit for the year relating to employee share-based payment plans was £818,000 (2019: charge of £765,000) which is in relation to equity-
settled share-based payment transactions. There are no liabilities arising from share-based payment transactions.

23.  Capital commitments
Capital commitments contracted for but not provided amounted to £480,000 (2019: £230,000).

24.  Pension commitments
The Group operates several defined contribution pension schemes for the benefit of its staff. The assets of the schemes are held separately from those 
of the Group in independently administered funds. The pension charges represent contributions payable by the Group to these funds and are shown in 
note 6. Amounts outstanding at the year end were £227,000 (2019: £219,000) and are held in accruals.

103

25.  Financial instruments – risk management
Financial risk management policy
The Group’s principal financial instruments comprise cash and cash equivalents. The main purpose of these financial instruments is to provide funds for 
the Group’s operations. The Group has other financial instruments being trade receivables and trade payables that arise directly from its operations.

It is, and has been, under review throughout the year, the Group’s policy that no trading in financial instruments shall be undertaken. The Group has not 
entered into derivative transactions during the years under review. The Group does not undertake any speculative transactions and continues to pursue 
prudent treasury policies by investing surplus funds only with reputable UK financial institutions. 

Credit risk
The finance for all the Group’s credit sales is provided from external financing companies who bear the whole risk of customer defaults on repayment. 
The Group’s financial assets which are past due and not impaired are deemed not material for disclosure. The remaining balance is deemed fully 
recoverable due to the use of finance houses to mitigate the risk of recoverability. There have been no gains/losses on financial liabilities. 

Cash and deposits are invested with Lloyds Bank plc. 

Liquidity risk
The Group’s exposure to liquidity risk is low, as historically working capital requirements have been funded entirely by self-generated cash flow. 

At 25 July 2020, the Group’s cash balance totalled £82.3m, and £20.6m was owed as trade payables for goods delivered. The Group has no drawn down 
debt, and further liquidity is available through the £20.0m CLBILS revolving credit facility (RCF) granted on 25 August. This facility is committed for a term 
of 36 months and would be renegotiated well in advance of this maturity date. The RCF is subject to certain covenants in respect of fixed charge cover, 
liquidity, leverage and capital spending.

Financial instruments by category
Financial assets and liabilities are classified in accordance with IFRS 9. No financial instruments have been reclassified or derecognised in the year.  
There are no financial assets which are pledged or held as collateral. The Group does not hold any financial assets or liabilities held as fair value through 
the income statement, defined as being in a hedging relationship or any available for sale financial assets. 

The Group’s main financial assets comprise cash and cash equivalents and trade receivables arising from the Group’s activities. These financial assets  
all meet the conditions to be recognised at amortised cost under IFRS 9 (previously loans and receivables under IAS 39).

Other than trade and other payables, the Group had no financial liabilities within the scope of IFRS 9 as at 25 July 2020 (2019: £nil). Balances within trade 
and other payables will mature within one year.

The fair value of the Group’s financial assets and liabilities is not materially different from their carrying values. Financial assets and liabilities comprise 
principally of trade receivables and trade payables and the only interest-bearing balances are the bank deposits and borrowings which attract interest  
at variable rates.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTS 
Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements continued

25.  Financial instruments – risk management continued
Capital management
The Group’s objectives when managing capital are to safeguard its ability to continue as a going concern and retain financial flexibility to provide  
returns for shareholders and benefits for other stakeholders. The Group considers capital to be equity and cash. Equity and cash are disclosed  
in the consolidated statement of financial position.

The Group manages its capital through continued focus on free cash flow generation and setting the level of capital expenditure and dividend  
in the context of the current period and forecast free cash flow. 

26.  Related parties
Holdings in subsidiaries and any relevant related party transactions are disclosed in the Company financial statements in note 5. Only ScS Furnishings 
Limited and the ScS Group Employee Benefit Trust are not included in the consolidation on the grounds of materiality.

27.  Contingent liabilities
The subsidiary undertakings of the Group are party to a debenture with Lloyds Bank plc which grants fixed and floating charges over the assets of each 
subsidiary undertaking.

28.  Treasury reserve

As at 28 July 2018
Transfer to retained earnings

As at 27 July 2019
Purchase of own shares
Transfer to retained earnings

As at 25 July 2020

£’000

268
(177)

91
754
(663)

182

104

During the current year, the Group’s Employee Benefit Trust purchased 324,582 ordinary shares of £0.001 each in the Group at an average price of  
232.2 pence per ordinary share for the purpose of satisfying management share incentive awards. 290,025 of these shares had been used to satisfy 
awards, with the remainder held as treasury shares. As at 25 July 2020 the Group holds 77,275 of its own ordinary shares of 0.1 pence each in the Group  
at an average purchase price of 234.9 pence.

As at 27 July 2019 the Group held 42,718 of its own ordinary shares of 0.1 pence each in the Group at an average purchase price of 214.2 pence for the 
purposes of satisfying management share incentive awards.

29.  Net debt

Cash and cash equivalents
Lease liabilities 

Net debt

Year ended  
25 July 2020
£’000

82,282
(136,420)

(54,138)

As a result of the adoption of IFRS 16, the Group is in a net debt position due to the recognition of a lease liability.

30. Post balance sheet events

On 25 August 2020, the Group arranged a £20.0m CLBILS revolving credit facility (RCF). This facility is committed for a term of 36 months. The RCF  
is subject to certain covenants in respect of fixed charge cover, liquidity, leverage and capital spending.

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 202031. Discontinued operations
Following the closure of the final House of Fraser concession in January 2019, in accordance with IFRS accounting standards, the results of the  
House of Fraser concessions are now presented as discontinued operations.

The income statement relating to the discontinued operations is set out below: 

Income statement of discontinued operations

Gross sales

Revenue
Cost of sales 

Gross profit
Distribution costs
Administrative expenses

Operating loss

Analysed as:
Operating profit/(loss) before exceptional items
Exceptional items*

Operating loss

Loss before taxation
Taxation

Loss from discontinued operations 

Attributable to:
Owners of the parent 

Loss attributable and total comprehensive loss for the period

Net cash inflow from operating activities

Net increase of cash generated from discontinued operations

Underlying EBITDA
An analysis of underlying EBITDA is as follows:

Operating profit/(loss) before exceptional items
Depreciation

Underlying EBITDA from discontinued operations
Exceptional items*

EBITDA from discontinued operations

Year ended
25 July 2020
£’000

Year ended
27 July 2019
£’000

–

–
–

–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–
–

–

–

–

–

–

7,279

7,193
(3,956)

3,237
(575)
(2,667)

(5)

438
(443)

(5)

(5)
1

(4)

(4)

(4)

1,492

1,492

Year ended
25 July 2020
£’000

Year ended
27 July 2019
£’000

–
–

–
–

–

438
86

524
(443)

81

105

*  Exceptional costs disclosed within discontinued operations comprise amounts payable for loss of office and other costs incurred relating to the closure of the  

House of Fraser concessions.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSCompany Statement of Financial Position
As at 25 July 2020

Non-current assets
Investments

Total non-current assets

Current assets
Trade and other receivables
Deferred tax asset

Cash at bank and in hand

Total current assets

Total assets

Current liabilities
Trade and other payables

Total current liabilities

Total liabilities

Capital and reserves
Called-up share capital
Share premium account
Capital redemption reserve
Treasury share reserve
Retained earnings

Total shareholders’ funds

106

Total equity

Total equity and liabilities

Note

5

6
7

8

9
9

12

2020
£’000

70,000

70,000

27
149

–

176

2019
£’000

70,000

70,000

4
–

–

4

70,176

70,004

12,563

12,563

12,563

38
16
15
(182)
57,726

57,613

57,613

70,176

6,488

6,488

6,488

40
16
13
(91)
63,538

63,516

63,516

70,004

The notes on pages 109 to 111 form an integral part of these financial statements.

The total comprehensive income for the year included within the financial statements of the Company is £3,612,000 (2019: £5,979,000).

The financial statements on pages 106 to 111 were approved by the Board and authorised for issue on 1 October 2020 and signed on its behalf by:

David Knight
Chief Executive Officer

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020Company Statement of Changes in Equity 
For the year ended 25 July 2020

At 29 July 2018
Total comprehensive income
Transfer to retained earnings
Dividends paid

At 27 July 2019

At 28 July 2019
Total comprehensive income
Purchase of own shares
Cancellation of repurchased shares
Treasury shares (note 12)
Dividends paid (note 10)

At 25 July 2020

Called-up
share
capital
£’000

Share
premium
account
£’000

Capital
redemption
reserve
£’000

Treasury
reserve
£’000

40
–
–
–

40

40
–
–
(2)
–
–

38

16
–
–
–

16

16
–
–
–
–
–

16

13
–
–
–

13

13
–
–
2
–
–

15

(268)
–
177
–

(91)

(91)
–
–
–
(91)
–

(182)

Retained
earnings
£’000

64,283
5,979
(177)
(6,547)

63,538

63,538
3,612
(4,425)
–
(663)
(4,336)

57,726

Total
equity
£’000

64,084
5,979
–
(6,547)

63,516

63,516
3,612
(4,425)
–
(754)
(4,336)

57,613

107

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSCompany Statement of Cash Flows
As at 25 July 2020

Cash flows from operating activities
Profit before taxation

Changes in working capital:
(Increase)/decrease in trade and other receivables
Increase in trade and other payables

Cash generated from operations
Net cash flow generated from operating activities

Net cash flow used in investing activities

Cash flows used in financing activities
Dividends paid 
Purchase of own shares

Net cash flow used in financing activities

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

108

Note

2020
£’000

2019
£’000

3,463

5,979

6
8

10

(23)
6,076

9,516
9,516

–

(4,336)
(5,180)

(9,516)

–

–

–

6
562

6,547
6,547

–

(6,547)
–

(6,547)

–

–

–

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020 
Notes to the Company Financial Statements 
For the year ended 25 July 2020

1.  General information 
ScS Group plc (the ‘Company’) is a company limited by shares incorporated and domiciled in England, within the UK (Company registration number 
03263435). The address of the registered office is 45-49 Villiers Street, Sunderland, SR1 1HA. The Company’s principal activity is to act as a holding 
company for its subsidiaries, and its shares are listed on the London Stock Exchange (LSE).

2.  Accounting policies
The principal accounting policies applied in the preparation of these financial statement are set out below. These policies have been consistently applied 
to all the years presented, unless otherwise stated.

Statement of compliance with FRS 101
These financial statements were prepared in accordance with Financial Reporting Standard 101, ‘Reduced Disclosure Framework’ (FRS 101). The Company 
meets the definition of a qualifying entity under FRS 100, ‘Application of Financial Reporting Requirements’ as issued by the Financial Reporting Council.

Basis of preparation
The financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention and in accordance with the Companies Act 2006.

As permitted by FRS 101, the Company has taken advantage of the disclosure exemptions available under that standard in relation to business combinations, 
financial instruments, capital management, presentation of comparative information in respect of certain assets, standards not yet effective, impairment 
of assets and related party transactions. Where required, equivalent disclosures are given in the consolidated financial statements of ScS Group plc.

Going concern 
The Company is the ultimate holding company to a group which is highly cash generative, and which holds sufficient medium and long-term facilities in 
place to enable it to meet its obligations as they fall due. The Directors are therefore satisfied that the Company has adequate resources to continue in 
operational existence for the foreseeable future.

Further information on the Group’s going concern and ongoing viability is provided in note 2 of the Group financial statements.

Critical accounting estimates and judgements
The preparation of financial statements in conformity with FRS 101 requires the use of certain critical accounting estimates. It also requires management 
to exercise its judgement in the process of applying the Company’s accounting policies. However, due to the nature of the Company, we do not consider 
there to be any critical accounting estimates or judgements made in the preparation of these financial statements, with the exception of the estimate 
noted below:

109

Carrying value of the investment
Management have considered the carrying value of the investment, given the Group’s reported loss for the year. Management calculated a value in use 
from cash flow projections based on the Group’s internal budgets, which are then extrapolated into perpetuity and discounted using the Group’s cost 
of capital. The key estimates for the value in use calculations are those regarding the discount rate used and expected future cash flows. Management 
utilised the budget and discount rate consistent with those use in the Group’s underlying store impairment calculations. Management’s value in use 
calculation provided significant headroom over the carrying investment value.

Capital management 
The Company follows the same capital management as the Group – see page 103 in the Group financial statements.

New standards, amendments and interpretations
For the latest amendments and interpretations, please refer to page 89 in the Group financial statements.

Fixed asset investments
Fixed asset investments in subsidiary undertakings are recorded at cost plus incidental expenses less any provision for impairment.

Trade receivables
Trade receivables for the Company refer to prepayments made for services performed in the ordinary course of business. Trade receivables are 
recognised initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method, less provision for impairment.

Trade payables
Trade payables are obligations to pay for goods or services that have been acquired in the ordinary course of business from suppliers. Trade payables  
are recognised initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method.

Treasury shares
The Employee Benefit Trust (EBT) provides for the issue of shares to Group employees, principally under share option schemes. Shares in the 
Company held by the EBT are included in the balance sheet as treasury shares at cost, including any directly attributable incremental costs. Subsequent 
consideration received for the sale of such shares is also recognised in equity, with any difference between the sale proceeds and the original cost being 
taken to retained earnings. No gain or loss is recognised in the financial statements on transactions in treasury shares. 

Taxation
The tax charge for the financial period is based on the profit for the financial period.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSNotes to the Company Financial Statements continued
For the year ended 25 July 2020

2.  Accounting policies continued
Related parties
In these financial statements, the Company has taken advantage of the following disclosure exemptions available under FRS 101:
 – The requirement of paragraph 17 of IAS 24 ‘Related Party Transactions’; and
 – The requirements in IAS 24 ‘Related Party Disclosures’ to disclose related party transactions entered into between two or more members of a group, 

provided that any subsidiary which is party to the transaction is a wholly-owned by such a member.

3.  Income statement exemption
The Company has elected to take the exemption under section 408 of the Companies Act 2006 from presenting the Income Statement or a Statement 
of Comprehensive income for the Company. Total comprehensive income for the Company for the year was £3,612,000 (2019: £5,979,000).

4.  Directors’ emoluments
No Executive Directors’ received any remuneration for their services to the Company (2019: £nil). All Executive Directors’ remuneration was borne  
by another Group company, A. Share and Sons Limited. These costs have been consolidated into the Group’s financial statements and are disclosed, 
along with the Non-Executive Directors’ fees, within the Remuneration Report on pages 62 to 68.

The Company does not employ any staff other than the Non-Executive Directors noted above.

5.  Investments

Cost and net book value
At 27 July 2019 and 25 July 2020

The subsidiaries, which were owned and incorporated in the United Kingdom were are as follows:

Name

Principal activity

110

Parlour Product Topco Limited

Holding company

Class of shares held

Ordinary

Held by subsidiary undertakings
Parlour Product Holding Limited
A. Share & Sons Limited
ScS Furnishings Limited

Holding company
Ordinary
Specialist retailer of upholstered furniture Ordinary
Ordinary
Dormant company

The registered office address for all of the subsidiaries is 45-49 Villiers Street, Sunderland, SR1 1HA.

All shares carry equal voting rights and are deemed to be controlled by ScS Group plc.

The Directors believe that the carrying value of the investments is supported by managements value in use model (see note 2).

ScS Furnishings Limited is exempt from audit as it is dormant. It’s aggregate amount of capital and reserves is £1.

Subsidiary
undertaking
£’000

70,000

% of holdings

100%

100%
100%
100%

6.  Trade and other receivables

Prepayments

7.  Deferred tax

The Company’s movements in deferred taxation during the current financial year and previous year are as follows: 

Opening deferred tax liability
Credited to profit and loss account arising from the origination and reversal of temporary differences 

Closing deferred tax asset

Deferred taxation has been fully provided for in respect of:

Losses

Closing deferred tax asset

2020
£’000

27

2019
£’000

4

Year ended
25 July 2020
£’000

Year ended
27 July 2019
£’000

–
149

149

–
–

–

Year ended
25 July 2020
£’000

Year ended
27 July 2019
£’000

149

149

–

–

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 20208.  Trade and other payables

Amounts owed to Group undertakings
Accruals and deferred income

2020
£’000

12,415
148

12,563

Amounts owed to Group undertakings are unsecured, interest-free and repayable on demand.

9.  Called-up share capital

As at 27 July 2019
Shares repurchased and cancelled

As at 25 July 2020

Number of shares 

Ordinary shares 
£’000

Share premium 
£’000

40,009,109
(1,996,454)

38,012,655

40
(2)

38

16
–

16

2019
£’000

6,320
168

6,488

Total 
£’000

56
(2)

54

Authorised, allotted and fully paid share capital is 38,012,655 of £0.001 each (2019: 40,009,109 of £0.001 each).

On 8 November 2019, the Company acquired 1,996,454 ordinary shares at a price of 220.0 pence per ordinary share from related party Parlour Product 
Holdings (LUX) S.A.R.L for a total consideration of £4,400,000. Following this purchase, the ordinary shares purchased by the Company were cancelled, 
and the Company’s issued share capital subsequently consists of 38,012,655 ordinary shares, each with one voting right.

10.  Dividends
A final dividend for the year ended 27 July 2019 of 11.20p was paid on 27 November 2019. It has been recognised in shareholders’ equity in the year  
to 25 July 2020.

An interim dividend of 5.50p per ordinary share was declared by the Board of Directors on 20 March 2020. However, the board did not feel it was 
appropriate to pay the dividend when receiving government support. A final dividend has not been proposed.

111

At 25 July 2020 the retained earnings of the Company amounted to £57,726,000

11.  Financial instruments
The Company has financial instruments, being trade receivables and trade payables, that arise directly from its operations. The financial instruments – 
risk management policy has been included in note 25 of the Group financial statements.

12.  Treasury reserve
Details of the Company’s share capital and share buybacks are given in note 28 of the notes to the Group financial statements.

STRATEGIC REPORTCORPORATE GOVERNANCEFINANCIAL STATEMENTSCompany Information

Registered office
ScS Group plc
45-49 Villiers Street
Sunderland
SR1 1HA
Tyne & Wear

Tel: 0191 731 3000
www.scsplc.co.uk

Company number
Registered in England: 03263435

Listing
Ordinary shares of ScS Group plc are listed with a premium listing on the London Stock Exchange.

Share registrar
Equiniti
Aspect House
Spencer Road
Lancing
West Sussex
BN99 6DA

Tel: 0871 384 2030
www.equiniti.com

112

Independent auditor
PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP
5th & 6th Floor
Central Square South
Orchard Street
Newcastle Upon Tyne
NE1 3AZ

Tel: 0191 232 8493
www.pwc.co.uk

Brokers
Shore Capital Group Ltd
Cassini House 
57 St James’s Street
London
SW1A 1LD

Tel: 020 7408 4050
www.shorecap.co.uk

Principal bankers
Lloyds Banking Group PLC
10 Gresham Street
London
EC2V 7AE

Tel: 020 7616 1500
www.lloydsbankinggroup.com

Financial PR
Buchanan
107 Cheapside
London
EC2V 6DN

Tel: 020 7466 5000
scs@buchanan.uk.com 

ScS Group plc  Annual Report 2020The outer cover of this report has been laminated 
with a biodegradable film. Around 20 months after 
composting, an additive within the film will initiate the 
process of oxidation.

S

c

S

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

2

0

ScS Group plc
45-49 Villiers Street
Sunderland
SR1 1HA
Tyne and Wear
Tel. 0191 731 3000
www.scs.co.uk